build system update for xindy-2.4 (xindy-new)

git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@16321 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751

1 files changed, 4354 insertions, 4354 deletions

diff --git a/Build/source/texk/web2c/mplibdir/mpxout.w b/Build/source/texk/web2c/mplibdir/mpxout.w
index d82eab751df..616ba9ae90c 100644
--- a/Build/source/texk/web2c/mplibdir/mpxout.w
+++ b/Build/source/texk/web2c/mplibdir/mpxout.w
@@ -1,4354 +1,4354 @@
-% $Id: mpxout.w 1061 2009-05-27 13:01:37Z taco $

-%

-% Copyright 2008-2009 Taco Hoekwater.

-%

-% This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify

-% it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by

-% the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or

-% (at your option) any later version.

-%

-% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,

-% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of

-% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the

-% GNU Lesser General Public License for more details.

-%

-% You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License

-% along with this program.  If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.

-

-\def\title{Creating mpx files}

-\def\hang{\hangindent 3em\indent\ignorespaces}

-\def\MP{MetaPost}

-\def\LaTeX{{\rm L\kern-.36em\raise.3ex\hbox{\sc a}\kern-.15em

-    T\kern-.1667em\lower.7ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX}}

-

-\def\(#1){} % this is used to make section names sort themselves better

-\def\9#1{} % this is used for sort keys in the index

-\def\[#1]{#1.}

-

-\pdfoutput=1

-

-@* \[1] Makempx overview.

-

-This source file implements the makempx functionality for the new \MP.

-It includes all of the functional code from the old standalone programs

-

-\item{}mpto

-\item{}dmp

-\item{}dvitomp

-\item{}makempx

-

-combined into one, with many changes to make all of the code cooperate

-nicely.

-

-@ Header files

-

-The local C preprocessor definitions have to come after the C includes

-in order to prevent name clashes.

-

-@c

-#include "config.h"

-#include <stdio.h>

-#include <stdlib.h>

-#include <string.h>

-#include <stdarg.h>

-#include <assert.h>

-#include <setjmp.h>

-#include <errno.h> /* TODO autoconf ? */

-/* unistd.h is needed for every non-Win32 platform, and we assume

- * that implies that sys/types.h is also present 

- */

-#ifndef WIN32

-#include <sys/types.h>

-#include <unistd.h>

-#endif

-/* processes */

-#ifdef WIN32

-#include <io.h>

-#include <process.h>

-#else

-#if HAVE_SYS_WAIT_H

-# include <sys/wait.h>

-#endif

-#ifndef WEXITSTATUS

-# define WEXITSTATUS(stat_val) ((unsigned)(stat_val) >> 8)

-#endif

-#ifndef WIFEXITED

-# define WIFEXITED(stat_val) (((stat_val) & 255) == 0)

-#endif

-#endif

-/* directories */

-#ifdef WIN32

-#include <direct.h>

-#else

-#if HAVE_DIRENT_H

-# include <dirent.h>

-#else

-# define dirent direct

-# if HAVE_SYS_NDIR_H

-#  include <sys/ndir.h>

-# endif

-# if HAVE_SYS_DIR_H

-#  include <sys/dir.h>

-# endif

-# if HAVE_NDIR_H

-#  include <ndir.h>

-# endif

-#endif

-#endif

-#if HAVE_SYS_STAT_H

-#include <sys/stat.h>

-#endif

-#include <ctype.h>

-#include <time.h>

-#include <math.h>

-#define trunc(x)   ((integer) (x))

-#define fabs(x)    ((x)<0?(-(x)):(x))

-#define floor(x)   ((integer) (fabs(x)))

-#ifndef PI

-#define PI  3.14159265358979323846

-#endif

-#include "avl.h"

-#include "mpxout.h"

-@h

-

-@ Data types

-

-From the Pascal code of DVItoMP two implicit types are inherited: |web_boolean| and

-|web_integer|. 

-

-The more complex datatypes are defined in the following sections. 

-

-@d true 1

-@d false 0

-

-@c

-typedef signed int web_integer;

-typedef signed int web_boolean;

-@<C Data Types@>

-@<Declarations@>

-

-@ The single most important data structure is the structure

-|mpx_data|.  It contains all of the global state for a specific

-|makempx| run. A pointer to it is passed as the first argument to just

-about every function call.

-

-One of the fields is a bit special because it is so important: |mode|

-is the decider between running \TeX\ or Troff as the typesetting

-engine.

-

-@(mpxout.h@>=

-typedef enum {

-  mpx_tex_mode=0,

-  mpx_troff_mode=1 

-} mpx_modes;

-typedef struct mpx_data * MPX;

-

-@ @<C Data Types@>=

-@<Types in the outer block@>

-typedef struct mpx_data {

-  int mode;

-  @<Globals@>

-} mpx_data ;

-

-@ Here are some macros for common programming idioms.

-

-@d MAXINT 0x7FFFFF /* somewhat arbitrary */

-

-@d incr(A)   (A)=(A)+1 /* increase a variable by unity */

-@d decr(A)   (A)=(A)-1 /* decrease a variable by unity */

-

-@ Once an MPX object is allocated, the memory it occupies needs to be

-initialized to a usable state. This procedure gets things started

-properly.

-

-This function is not allowed to run |mpx_abort| because at this

-point the jump buffer is not yet initialized, so it should only

-be used for things that cannot go wrong!

-

-@c

-static void mpx_initialize (MPX mpx) {

-  memset(mpx,0,sizeof(struct mpx_data));

-  @<Set initial values@>@/

-}

-

-@ A global variable |history| keeps track of what type of errors have

-occurred with the hope that that \MP\ can be warned of any problems.

-

-@<Types...@>=

-enum mpx_history_states {

- mpx_spotless=0, /* |history| value when no problems have been found */

- mpx_cksum_trouble, /* |history| value there have been font checksum mismatches */

- mpx_warning_given, /* |history| value after a recoverable error */

- mpx_fatal_error /* |history| value if processing had to be aborted */

-};

-

-

-@ @<Glob...@>=

-int history;

-

-@ @<Set init...@>=

-mpx->history=mpx_spotless;

-

-@ The structure has room for the names and the |FILE *| for the 

-input and output files. The most important ones are listed here,

-the variables for the intermediate files are declared where they

-are needed.

-

-@<Globals@>=

-char *banner;

-char *mpname;

-FILE *mpfile;

-char *mpxname;

-FILE *mpxfile;

-FILE *errfile;

-int lnno ;           /* current line number */

-

-@ A set of basic reporting functions. 

-

-@c

-static void mpx_printf(MPX mpx, const char *header, const char *msg, va_list ap) {

-  fprintf(mpx->errfile, "makempx %s: %s:", header, mpx->mpname);

-  if (mpx->lnno!=0)

-    fprintf(mpx->errfile, "%d:", mpx->lnno);

-  fprintf(mpx->errfile, " ");

-  (void)vfprintf(mpx->errfile, msg, ap);

-  fprintf(mpx->errfile, "\n");

-}

-

-@ @c

-static void mpx_report(MPX mpx, const char *msg, ...) {

-  va_list ap;

-  if (mpx->debug==0) return;

-  va_start(ap, msg);

-  mpx_printf(mpx, "debug", msg, ap);

-  va_end(ap);

-  if ( mpx->history < mpx_warning_given ) 

-    mpx->history=mpx_cksum_trouble;

-}

- 

-@ @c

-static void mpx_warn(MPX mpx, const char *msg, ...) {

-  va_list ap;

-  va_start(ap, msg);

-  mpx_printf(mpx, "warning", msg, ap);

-  va_end(ap);

-  if ( mpx->history < mpx_warning_given ) 

-    mpx->history=mpx_cksum_trouble;

-}

-

-@ @c

-static void mpx_error(MPX mpx, const char *msg, ...) {

-  va_list ap;

-  va_start(ap, msg);

-  mpx_printf(mpx, "error", msg, ap);

-  va_end(ap);

-  mpx->history=mpx_warning_given;

-}

-

-@  The program uses a |jump_buf| to handle non-local returns, 

-this is initialized at a single spot: the start of |mp_makempx|.

-

-@d mpx_jump_out longjmp(mpx->jump_buf,1)

-

-@<Glob...@>=

-jmp_buf jump_buf;

-

-@ 

-@c

-static void mpx_abort(MPX mpx, const char *msg, ...) {

-  va_list ap;

-  va_start(ap, msg);

-  fprintf(stderr, "fatal: ");

-  (void)vfprintf(stderr, msg, ap);

-  mpx_printf(mpx, "fatal", msg, ap);

-  va_end(ap);

-  mpx->history=mpx_fatal_error;

-  mpx_erasetmp(mpx);

-  mpx_jump_out;

-}

-

-@ @<Install and test the non-local jump buffer@>=

-if (setjmp(mpx->jump_buf) != 0) { 

-  int h = mpx->history;

-  xfree(mpx->buf);

-  xfree(mpx->maincmd);

-  xfree(mpx->mpname);

-  xfree(mpx->mpxname);

-  xfree(mpx);

-  return h; 

-}

-

-@ @c

-static FILE *mpx_xfopen (MPX mpx, const char *fname, const char *fmode) {

-  FILE *f  = fopen(fname,fmode);

-  if (f == NULL)

-    mpx_abort(mpx,"File open error for %s in mode %s", fname, fmode);

-  return f;

-}

-static void mpx_fclose (MPX mpx, FILE *file) {

-  (void)mpx;

-  (void)fclose(file);

-}

-

-@ 

-@d xfree(A) do { mpx_xfree(A); A=NULL; } while (0)

-@d xrealloc(P,A,B) mpx_xrealloc(mpx,P,A,B)

-@d xmalloc(A,B)  mpx_xmalloc(mpx,A,B)

-@d xstrdup(A)  mpx_xstrdup(mpx,A)

-

-@<Declarations@>=

-static void mpx_xfree (void *x);

-static void *mpx_xrealloc (MPX mpx, void *p, size_t nmem, size_t size) ;

-static void *mpx_xmalloc (MPX mpx, size_t nmem, size_t size) ;

-static char *mpx_xstrdup(MPX mpX, const char *s);

-

-

-@ The |max_size_test| guards against overflow, on the assumption that

-|size_t| is at least 31bits wide.

-

-@d max_size_test 0x7FFFFFFF

-

-@c

-static void mpx_xfree (void *x) {

-  if (x!=NULL) free(x);

-}

-static void  *mpx_xrealloc (MPX mpx, void *p, size_t nmem, size_t size) {

-  void *w ; 

-  if ((max_size_test/size)<nmem) {

-    mpx_abort(mpx,"Memory size overflow");

-  }

-  w = realloc (p,(nmem*size));

-  if (w==NULL) mpx_abort(mpx,"Out of Memory");

-  return w;

-}

-static void  *mpx_xmalloc (MPX mpx, size_t nmem, size_t size) {

-  void *w;

-  if ((max_size_test/size)<nmem) {

-    mpx_abort(mpx,"Memory size overflow");

-  }

-  w = malloc (nmem*size);

-  if (w==NULL) mpx_abort(mpx,"Out of Memory");

-  return w;

-}

-static char *mpx_xstrdup(MPX mpx, const char *s) {

-  char *w; 

-  if (s==NULL)

-    return NULL;

-  w = strdup(s);

-  if (w==NULL) mpx_abort(mpx,"Out of Memory");

-  return w;

-}

-@* The command 'newer' became a function.

-

-We may have high-res timers in struct stat.  If we do, use them. 

-

-@c

-static int mpx_newer(char *source, char *target) {

-    struct stat source_stat, target_stat;

-#if HAVE_SYS_STAT_H

-    if (stat(target, &target_stat) < 0) return 0; /* true */

-    if (stat(source, &source_stat) < 0) return 1; /* false */

-#if HAVE_ST_MTIM

-    if (source_stat.st_mtim.tv_sec > target_stat.st_mtim.tv_sec || 

-         (source_stat.st_mtim.tv_sec  == target_stat.st_mtim.tv_sec && 

-          source_stat.st_mtim.tv_nsec >= target_stat.st_mtim.tv_nsec))

-  	  return 0;

-#else

-    if (source_stat.st_mtime >= target_stat.st_mtime)

-  	  return 0;

-#endif

-#endif

-    return 1;

-}

-

-

-

-@* Extracting data from \MP\ input.

-

-This part of the program transforms a \MP\ input file into a \TeX\ or

-troff input file by stripping out \.{btex}$\ldots$\.{etex} and 

-\.{verbatimtex}$\ldots$\.{etex} sections.  

-Leading and trailing spaces and tabs are removed from the

-extracted material and it is surrounded by the preceding and following

-strings defined immediately below.  The input file should be given as

-argument 1 and the resulting \TeX\ or troff file is written on standard

-output.

-

-John Hobby wrote the original version, which has since been

-extensively altered. The current implementation is a bit trickier 

-than I would like, but changing it will take careful study and 

-will likely make it run slower, so I've left it as-is for now.

-

-@<Globals@>=

-int texcnt ;         /* btex..etex blocks so far */

-int verbcnt ;        /* verbatimtex..etex blocks so far */

-char *bb, *tt, *aa;     /* start of before, token, and after strings */

-char *buf;      /* the input line */

-unsigned bufsize;

-

-@ @<Set initial values@>=

-mpx->bufsize = 1000;

-

-@ This function returns NULL on EOF, otherwise it returns |buf|. 

-

-@c 

-static char *mpx_getline(MPX mpx, FILE *mpfile) {

-    int c;

-    unsigned loc = 0;

-    if (feof(mpfile))

-      return NULL; 

-    if (mpx->buf==NULL)

-      mpx->buf = xmalloc(mpx->bufsize,1);

-    while ((c = getc(mpfile)) != EOF && c != '\n' && c != '\r') {

-      mpx->buf[loc++] = c;

-      if (loc == mpx->bufsize) {

-        char *temp = mpx->buf;

-        unsigned n = mpx->bufsize + (mpx->bufsize>>4);

-        if (n>MAXINT) 

-          mpx_abort(mpx,"Line is too long");

-        mpx->buf = xmalloc(n,1);

-        memcpy(mpx->buf,temp,mpx->bufsize);

-        free(temp);

-        mpx->bufsize = n;

-      }

-    }

-    mpx->buf[loc] = 0;

-    if (c == '\r') {

-        c = getc(mpfile);

-        if (c != '\n')

-            ungetc(c, mpfile);

-    }

-    mpx->lnno++;

-    return mpx->buf;

-}

-

-

-@ Return nonzero if a prefix of string $s$ matches the null-terminated string $t$

-and the next character is not a letter or an underscore.

-

-@c

-static int mpx_match_str(const char *s, const char *t) {

-    while (*t != 0) {

-        if (*s != *t)

-            return 0;

-        s++;       

-        t++;    

-    }

-    if ((*s>= 'a' && *s<='z') || (*s>= 'A' && *s<='Z') || *s == '_')

-        return 0;

-    return 1;

-}

-

-

-@ This function tries to express $s$ as the concatenation of three

-strings $b$, $t$, $a$, with the global pointers $bb$, $tt$, and $aa$ set to the

-start of the corresponding strings.  String $t$ is either a quote mark,

-a percent sign, or an alphabetic token \.{btex}, \.{etex}, or

-\.{verbatimtex}.  (An alphabetic token is a maximal sequence of letters

-and underscores.)  If there are several possible substrings $t$, we

-choose the leftmost one.  If there is no such $t$, we set $b=s$ and return 0.

- 

-@c

-static int mpx_getbta(MPX mpx, char *s) {

-  int ok = 1;         /* zero if last character was |a-z|, |A-Z|, or |_| */

-  mpx->bb = s;

-  if (s==NULL) {

-    mpx->tt = NULL;

-    mpx->aa = NULL;

-    return 0;

-  }

-  for (mpx->tt = mpx->bb; *(mpx->tt) != 0; mpx->tt++) {

-    switch (*(mpx->tt)) {

-    case '"':

-    case '%':

-        mpx->aa = mpx->tt + 1;

-        return 1;

-    case 'b':

-        if (ok && mpx_match_str(mpx->tt, "btex")) {

-        mpx->aa = mpx->tt + 4;

-        return 1;

-        } else

-        ok = 0;

-        break;

-    case 'e':

-        if (ok && mpx_match_str(mpx->tt, "etex")) {

-        mpx->aa = mpx->tt + 4;

-        return 1;

-        } else

-        ok = 0;

-        break;

-    case 'v':

-        if (ok && mpx_match_str(mpx->tt, "verbatimtex")) {

-        mpx->aa = mpx->tt + 11;

-        return 1;

-        } else

-        ok = 0;

-        break;

-    default:

-       if ((*(mpx->tt) >= 'a' && *(mpx->tt) <= 'z') ||

-           (*(mpx->tt) >= 'A' && *(mpx->tt) <= 'Z') ||

-           (*(mpx->tt) == '_'))

-         ok = 0;

-       else

-         ok = 1;

-     }

-  }

-  mpx->aa = mpx->tt;

-  return 0;

-}

-

-@ @c

-static void mpx_copy_mpto (MPX mpx, FILE *outfile) {

-    char *s;            /* where a string to print stops */

-    char *t;            /* for finding start of last line */

-    char c;

-    char *res = NULL;

-    do {

-    if (mpx->aa == NULL || *mpx->aa == 0) {

-      if ((mpx->aa = mpx_getline(mpx,mpx->mpfile)) == NULL) {

-        mpx_error(mpx,"btex section does not end"); 

-        return;

-      }

-    }

-    if (mpx_getbta(mpx, mpx->aa) && *(mpx->tt) == 'e') {

-      s = mpx->tt;

-    } else {

-      if (mpx->tt == NULL) {

-        mpx_error(mpx,"btex section does not end"); 

-        return;

-      } else if (*(mpx->tt) == 'b') {

-        mpx_error(mpx,"btex in TeX mode");

-        return;

-      } else if (*(mpx->tt) == 'v') {

-        mpx_error(mpx,"verbatimtex in TeX mode");

-        return;

-      }

-      s = mpx->aa;

-    }

-    c = *s;

-    *s = 0;

-    if (res==NULL) {

-      res = xmalloc(strlen(mpx->bb)+2,1);

-      res = strncpy(res,mpx->bb,(strlen(mpx->bb)+1));

-    } else {

-      res = xrealloc(res,strlen(res)+strlen(mpx->bb)+2,1);

-      res = strncat(res,mpx->bb, strlen(mpx->bb));

-    }

-    if (c == '\0')

-        res = strncat(res, "\n", 1);

-    *s = c;

-    } while (*(mpx->tt) != 'e');

-    /* whitespace at the end */

-    for (s = res + strlen(res) - 1;

-         s >= res && (*s == ' ' || *s == '\t' || *s == '\r' || *s == '\n'); s--);

-    t = s;

-    *(++s) = '\0';

-    /* whitespace at the start */

-    for (s = res;

-         s < (res + strlen(res)) && (*s == ' ' || *s == '\t' || *s == '\r'

-                     || *s == '\n'); s++);

-    for (; *t != '\n' && t > s; t--);

-    fprintf(outfile,"%s", s);

-    /* put no |%| at end if it's only 1 line total, starting with |%|;

-     * this covers the special case |%&format| in a single line. */

-    if (t != s || *t != '%')

-    fprintf(outfile,"%%");

-    free(res);

-}

-

-

-@ Static strings for mpto

-

-@c

-static const char *mpx_predoc[]  = {"", ".po 0\n"};

-static const char *mpx_postdoc[] = { "\\end{document}\n", ""};

-static const char *mpx_pretex1[] = { 

-    "\\gdef\\mpxshipout{\\shipout\\hbox\\bgroup%\n"

-    "  \\setbox0=\\hbox\\bgroup}%\n"

-    "\\gdef\\stopmpxshipout{\\egroup"

-    "  \\dimen0=\\ht0 \\advance\\dimen0\\dp0\n"

-    "  \\dimen1=\\ht0 \\dimen2=\\dp0\n"

-    "  \\setbox0=\\hbox\\bgroup\n"

-    "    \\box0\n"

-    "    \\ifnum\\dimen0>0 \\vrule width1sp height\\dimen1 depth\\dimen2 \n"

-    "    \\else \\vrule width1sp height1sp depth0sp\\relax\n"

-    "    \\fi\\egroup\n"

-    "  \\ht0=0pt \\dp0=0pt \\box0 \\egroup}\n"

-    "\\mpxshipout%% line %d %s\n", ".lf %d %s\n" };

-static const char *mpx_pretex[] = { "\\mpxshipout%% line %d %s\n", ".bp\n.lf %d %s\n" };

-static const char *mpx_posttex[] = { "\n\\stopmpxshipout\n", "\n" };

-static const char *mpx_preverb1[] = {"", ".lf %d %s\n" };    /* if very first instance */

-static const char *mpx_preverb[] = { "%% line %d %s\n", ".lf %d %s\n"};  /* all other instances */

-static const char *mpx_postverb[] = { "\n", "\n" } ;

-

-@ @c

-static void mpx_mpto(MPX mpx, char *tmpname, char *mptexpre) {

-    FILE *outfile;

-    int mode      = mpx->mode;

-    char *mpname  = mpx->mpname; 

-    if (mode==mpx_tex_mode) {

-       TMPNAME_EXT(mpx->tex,".tex");

-    } else {

-       TMPNAME_EXT(mpx->tex,".i");

-    }

-    outfile  = mpx_xfopen(mpx,mpx->tex, "wb");

-    if (mode==mpx_tex_mode) {

-      FILE *fr;

-      if ((fr = fopen(mptexpre, "r"))!= NULL) {

-           size_t i;

-  	   char buf[512];

-           while ((i=fread((void *)buf, 1, 512 , fr))>0) {

-	      fwrite((void *)buf,1, i, outfile);

-           }

- 	   mpx_fclose(mpx,fr);

-      }

-    }

-    mpx->mpfile   = mpx_xfopen(mpx,mpname, "r");

-    fprintf(outfile,"%s", mpx_predoc[mode]);

-    while (mpx_getline(mpx, mpx->mpfile) != NULL)

-        @<Do a line@>;

-    fprintf(outfile,"%s", mpx_postdoc[mode]);

-    mpx_fclose(mpx,mpx->mpfile);

-    mpx_fclose(mpx,outfile);

-    mpx->lnno = 0;

-}

-

-@ 

-@<Do a line@>=

-{

-  mpx->aa = mpx->buf;

-  while (mpx_getbta(mpx, mpx->aa)) {

-    if (*(mpx->tt) == '%') {

-      break;

-    } else if (*(mpx->tt) == '"') {

-      do {

-        if (!mpx_getbta(mpx, mpx->aa))

-          mpx_error(mpx,"string does not end");

-      } while (*(mpx->tt) != '"');

-    } else if (*(mpx->tt) == 'b') {

-      if (mpx->texcnt++ == 0)

-        fprintf(outfile,mpx_pretex1[mode], mpx->lnno, mpname);

-      else

-        fprintf(outfile,mpx_pretex[mode], mpx->lnno, mpname);

-      mpx_copy_mpto(mpx, outfile);

-      fprintf(outfile,"%s", mpx_posttex[mode]);

-    } else if (*(mpx->tt) == 'v') {

-      if (mpx->verbcnt++ == 0 && mpx->texcnt == 0)

-        fprintf(outfile,mpx_preverb1[mode], mpx->lnno, mpname);

-      else

-        fprintf(outfile,mpx_preverb[mode], mpx->lnno, mpname);

-      mpx_copy_mpto(mpx, outfile);

-      fprintf(outfile,"%s", mpx_postverb[mode]);

-    } else {

-      mpx_error(mpx,"unmatched etex");

-    }

-  }

-}

-

-@ @<Run |mpto| on the mp file@>=

-mpx_mpto(mpx, tmpname, mpxopt->mptexpre)

-

-@* DVItoMP Processing.

-

-The \.{DVItoMP} program reads binary device-independent (``\.{DVI}'')

-files that are produced by document compilers such as \TeX, and converts them

-into a symbolic form understood by \MP.  It is loosely based on the \.{DVItype}

-utility program that produces a more faithful symbolic form of a \.{DVI} file.

-

-The output file is a sequence of \MP\ picture expressions, one for every page

-in the \.{DVI} file.  It makes no difference to \.{DVItoMP} where the \.{DVI}

-file comes from, but it is intended to process the result of running \TeX\

-or \LaTeX\ on the output of the extraction process that is defined above.  

-Such a \.{DVI} file will contain one page for every \.{btex}$\ldots$\.{etex} 

-block in the original input.  Processing with \.{DVItoMP} creates a 

-corresponding sequence of \MP\ picture expressions for use as an auxiliary 

-input file.  Since \MP\ expects such files to have the extension \.{.MPX}, 

-the output of \.{DVItoMP} is sometimes called an ``\.{MPX}'' file.

-

-@ The following parameters can be changed at compile time to extend or

-reduce \.{DVItoMP}'s capacity. 

-

-TODO: dynamic reallocation

-

-@d virtual_space 1000000 /* maximum total bytes of typesetting commands for virtual fonts */

-@d max_fonts 1000 /* maximum number of distinct fonts per \.{DVI} file */

-@d max_fnums 3000 /* maximum number of fonts plus fonts local to virtual fonts */

-@d max_widths (256*max_fonts) /* maximum number of different characters among all fonts */

-@d line_length 79 /* maximum output line length (must be at least 60) */

-@d stack_size 100 /* \.{DVI} files shouldn't |push| beyond this depth */

-@d font_tolerance 0.00001

-  /* font sizes should match to within this multiple of $2^{20}$ \.{DVI} units */

-

-@ If the \.{DVI} file is badly malformed, the whole process must be aborted;

-\.{DVItoMP} will give up, after issuing an error message about the symptoms

-that were noticed.

-

-@d bad_dvi(A)       mpx_abort(mpx,"Bad DVI file: " A "!")

-@d bad_dvi_two(A,B) mpx_abort(mpx,"Bad DVI file: %s !", A, B)

-@.Bad DVI file@>

-

-@* The character set.

-

-Like all programs written with the  \.{WEB} system, \.{DVItoMP} can be

-used with any character set. It an identify transfrom internally, because

-the programming for portable input-output is easier when a fixed internal

-code is used, and because \.{DVI} files use ASCII code for file names.

-

-In the conversion from Pascal to C, the |xchr| array has been removed.

-Because some systems may still want to change the input--output character

-set, the accesses to |xchr| and |printable| are replaced by macro calls.

-

-@d printable(c) (isprint(c) && c < 128 && c!='"')

-@d xchr(A) (A)

-

-@ @c 

-static void mpx_open_mpxfile (MPX mpx) { /* prepares to write text on |mpxfile| */

-   mpx->mpxfile = mpx_xfopen (mpx,mpx->mpxname, "wb");

-}

-

-@* Device-independent file format.

-The format of \.{DVI} files is described in many places including

-\.{dvitype.web} and Volume~B of D.~E. Knuth's {\sl Computers and Typesetting}.

-This program refers to the following command codes.

-

-@d id_byte 2 /* identifies the kind of \.{DVI} files described here */

-@#

-@d set_char_0 0 /* typeset character 0 and move right */

-@d set1 128 /* typeset a character and move right */

-@d set_rule 132 /* typeset a rule and move right */

-@d put1 133 /* typeset a character */

-@d put_rule 137 /* typeset a rule */

-@d nop 138 /* no operation */

-@d bop 139 /* beginning of page */

-@d eop 140 /* ending of page */

-@d push 141 /* save the current positions */

-@d pop 142 /* restore previous positions */

-@d right1 143 /* move right */

-@d w0 147 /* move right by |w| */

-@d w1 148 /* move right and set |w| */

-@d x0 152 /* move right by |x| */

-@d x1 153 /* move right and set |x| */

-@d down1 157 /* move down */

-@d y0 161 /* move down by |y| */

-@d y1 162 /* move down and set |y| */

-@d z0 166 /* move down by |z| */

-@d z1 167 /* move down and set |z| */

-@d fnt_num_0 171 /* set current font to 0 */

-@d fnt1 235 /* set current font */

-@d xxx1 239 /* extension to \.{DVI} primitives */

-@d xxx4 242 /* potentially long extension to \.{DVI} primitives */

-@d fnt_def1 243 /* define the meaning of a font number */

-@d pre 247 /* preamble */

-@d post 248 /* postamble beginning */

-@d post_post 249 /* postamble ending */

-@d undefined_commands 250: case 251: case 252: case 253: case 254: case 255

-

-@* Input from binary files.

-

-@ The program deals with two binary file variables: |dvi_file| is the main

-input file that we are translating into symbolic form, and |tfm_file| is

-the current font metric file from which character-width information is

-being read.  It is convenient to have a throw-away variable for function

-results when reading parts of the files that are being skipped.

-

-@<Glob...@>=

-FILE * dvi_file; /* the input file */

-FILE * tfm_file; /* a font metric file */

-FILE * vf_file; /* a virtual font file */

-

-@ Prepares to read packed bytes in |dvi_file|

-@c 

-static void mpx_open_dvi_file (MPX mpx) {

-    mpx->dvi_file = fopen(mpx->dviname,"rb");

-    if (mpx->dvi_file==NULL)

-      mpx_abort(mpx,"DVI generation failed");

-}

-

-@ Prepares to read packed bytes in |tfm_file|

-@c 

-static web_boolean mpx_open_tfm_file (MPX mpx) { 

-  mpx->tfm_file = mpx_fsearch(mpx, mpx->cur_name, mpx_tfm_format);

-  if (mpx->tfm_file == NULL)

-	  mpx_abort(mpx,"Cannot find TFM %s", mpx->cur_name);

-  free (mpx->cur_name); /* We |xmalloc|'d this before we got called. */

-  return true; /* If we get here, we succeeded. */

-}

-

-@ Prepares to read packed bytes in |vf_file|. 

-It's ok if the \.{VF} file doesn't exist.

-

-@c 

-static web_boolean mpx_open_vf_file (MPX mpx) {

-  mpx->vf_file = mpx_fsearch(mpx, mpx->cur_name, mpx_vf_format);

-  if (mpx->vf_file) {

-    free (mpx->cur_name);

-    return true;

-  } 

-  return false;

-}

-

-@ If you looked carefully at the preceding code, you probably asked,

-``What is |cur_name|?'' Good question. It's a global

-variable: |cur_name| is a string variable that will be set to the

-current font metric file name before |open_tfm_file| or |open_vf_file|

-is called.

-

-@<Glob...@>=

-char *cur_name; /* external name */

-

-@ It turns out to be convenient to read four bytes at a time, when we are

-inputting from \.{TFM} files. The input goes into global variables

-|b0|, |b1|, |b2|, and |b3|, with |b0| getting the first byte and |b3|

-the fourth.

-

-@<Glob...@>=

-int b0, b1, b2, b3; /* four bytes input at once */

-

-@ The |read_tfm_word| procedure sets |b0| through |b3| to the next

-four bytes in the current \.{TFM} file.

-

-@c 

-static void mpx_read_tfm_word (MPX mpx) { 

-  mpx->b0 = getc(mpx->tfm_file); 

-  mpx->b1 = getc(mpx->tfm_file);

-  mpx->b2 = getc(mpx->tfm_file);

-  mpx->b3 = getc(mpx->tfm_file);

-}

-

-@ Input can come from from three different sources depending on the settings

-of global variables.  When |vf_reading| is true, we read from the \.{VF} file.

-Otherwise, input can either come directly from |dvi_file| or from a buffer

-|cmd_buf|.  The latter case applies whenever |buf_ptr<virtual_space|.

-

-@<Glob...@>=

-web_boolean vf_reading; /* should input come from |vf_file|? */

-unsigned char cmd_buf[(virtual_space+1)]; /* commands for virtual characters */

-unsigned int buf_ptr; /* |cmd_buf| index for the next byte */

-

-@ @<Set init...@>=

-mpx->vf_reading=false;

-mpx->buf_ptr=virtual_space;

-

-@ We shall use a set of simple functions to read the next byte or bytes from the

-current input source. There are seven possibilities, each of which is treated

-as a separate function in order to minimize the overhead for subroutine calls.

-

-@c 

-static web_integer mpx_get_byte (MPX mpx) { /* returns the next byte, unsigned */

-  unsigned char b;

-  @<Read one byte into |b|@>;

-  return b;

-}

-

-static web_integer mpx_signed_byte (MPX mpx) { /* returns the next byte, signed */ 

-  unsigned char b;

-  @<Read one byte into |b|@>;

-  return ( b<128 ? b : (b-256));

-}

-

-static web_integer mpx_get_two_bytes (MPX mpx) { /* returns the next two bytes, unsigned */

-  unsigned char a,b;

-  a=0; b=0; /* for compiler warnings */

-  @<Read two bytes into |a| and |b|@>;

-  return (a*(int)(256)+b);

-}

-

-static web_integer mpx_signed_pair (MPX mpx) { /* returns the next two bytes, signed */

-  unsigned char a,b;

-  a=0; b=0; /* for compiler warnings */

-  @<Read two bytes into |a| and |b|@>;

-  if ( a<128 ) return (a*256+b);

-  else return ((a-256)*256+b);

-}

-

-static web_integer mpx_get_three_bytes (MPX mpx) { /* returns the next three bytes, unsigned */

-  unsigned char a,b,c;

-  a=0; b=0; c=0; /* for compiler warnings */

-  @<Read three bytes into |a|, |b|, and~|c|@>;

-  return ((a*(int)(256)+b)*256+c);

-}

-

-static web_integer mpx_signed_trio (MPX mpx) { /* returns the next three bytes, signed */

-  unsigned char a,b,c;

-  a=0; b=0; c=0; /* for compiler warnings */

-  @<Read three bytes into |a|, |b|, and~|c|@>;

-  if ( a<128 ) return ((a*(int)(256)+b)*256+c);

-  else  return (((a-(int)(256))*256+b)*256+c);

-}

-

-static web_integer mpx_signed_quad (MPX mpx) { /* returns the next four bytes, signed */

-  unsigned char a,b,c,d;

-  a=0; b=0; c=0; d=0; /* for compiler warnings */

-  @<Read four bytes into |a|, |b|, |c|, and~|d|@>;

-  if ( a<128 ) return (((a*(int)(256)+b)*256+c)*256+d);

-  else return ((((a-256)*(int)(256)+b)*256+c)*256+d);

-}

-

-@ @<Read one byte into |b|@>=

-if ( mpx->vf_reading ) {

-  b = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->vf_file);

-} else if ( mpx->buf_ptr==virtual_space ) {

-  b = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->dvi_file);

-} else { 

-  b=mpx->cmd_buf[mpx->buf_ptr];

-  incr(mpx->buf_ptr);

-}

-

-@ @<Read two bytes into |a| and |b|@>=

-if ( mpx->vf_reading ) { 

-  a = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->vf_file);

-  b = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->vf_file);

-} else if ( mpx->buf_ptr==virtual_space ) { 

-  a = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->dvi_file);

-  b = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->dvi_file);

-} else if ( mpx->buf_ptr+2>mpx->n_cmds ) {

-  mpx_abort(mpx,"Error detected while interpreting a virtual font");

-@.Error detected while...@>

-} else { 

-  a=mpx->cmd_buf[mpx->buf_ptr];

-  b=mpx->cmd_buf[mpx->buf_ptr+1];

-  mpx->buf_ptr+=2;

-}

-

-@ @<Read three bytes into |a|, |b|, and~|c|@>=

-if ( mpx->vf_reading ) { 

-  a = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->vf_file);

-  b = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->vf_file);

-  c = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->vf_file);

-} else if ( mpx->buf_ptr==virtual_space ) { 

-  a = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->dvi_file);

-  b = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->dvi_file);

-  c = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->dvi_file);

-} else if ( mpx->buf_ptr+3>mpx->n_cmds ) {

-  mpx_abort(mpx,"Error detected while interpreting a virtual font");

-@.Error detected while...@>

-} else { 

-  a=mpx->cmd_buf[mpx->buf_ptr];

-  b=mpx->cmd_buf[mpx->buf_ptr+1];

-  c=mpx->cmd_buf[mpx->buf_ptr+2];

-  mpx->buf_ptr+=3;

-}

-

-@ @<Read four bytes into |a|, |b|, |c|, and~|d|@>=

-if ( mpx->vf_reading ) { 

-  a = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->vf_file);

-  b = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->vf_file);

-  c = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->vf_file);

-  d = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->vf_file);

-} else if ( mpx->buf_ptr==virtual_space ) { 

-  a = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->dvi_file);

-  b = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->dvi_file);

-  c = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->dvi_file);

-  d = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->dvi_file);

-} else if ( mpx->buf_ptr+4>mpx->n_cmds ) {

-  mpx_abort(mpx,"Error detected while interpreting a virtual font");

-@.Error detected while...@>

-} else { 

-  a=mpx->cmd_buf[mpx->buf_ptr];

-  b=mpx->cmd_buf[mpx->buf_ptr+1];

-  c=mpx->cmd_buf[mpx->buf_ptr+2];

-  d=mpx->cmd_buf[mpx->buf_ptr+3];

-  mpx->buf_ptr+=4;

-}

-

-@* Data structures for fonts.

-

-\.{DVI} file format does not include information about character widths, since

-that would tend to make the files a lot longer. But a program that reads

-a \.{DVI} file is supposed to know the widths of the characters that appear

-in \\{set\_char} commands. Therefore \.{DVItoMP} looks at the font metric

-(\.{TFM}) files for the fonts that are involved.

-@.TFM {\rm files}@>

-

-@ For purposes of this program, the only thing we need to know about a

-given character |c| in a non-virtual font |f| is the width.  For the font as

-a whole, all we need is the symbolic name to use in the \.{MPX} file.

-

-This information appears implicitly in the following data

-structures. The current number of fonts defined is |nf|. Each such font has

-an internal number |f|, where |0<=f<nf|.  There is also an external number

-that identifies the font in the \.{DVI} file.  The correspondence is

-maintained in arrays |font_num| and |internal_num| so that |font_num[i]|

-is the external number for |f=internal_num[i]|.

-The external name of this font is the string that occupies |font_name[f]|.

-The legal characters run from |font_bc[f]| to |font_ec[f]|, inclusive.

-The \.{TFM} file can specify that some of these are invalid, but this doesn't

-concern \.{DVItoMP} because it does not do extensive error checking.

-The width of character~|c| in font~|f| is given by

-|char_width(f,c)=width[info_base[f]+c]|, and |info_ptr| is the

-first unused position of the |width| array.

-

-If font~|f| is a virtual font, there is a list of \.{DVI} commands for each

-character.  These occupy consecutive positions in the |cmd_buf| array with

-the commands for character~|c| starting at

-|start_cmd(f,c)=cmd_ptr[info_base[f]+c]| and ending just before

-|start_cmd(f,c+1)|.  Font numbers used when interpreting these \.{DVI}

-commands occupy positions |fbase[f]| through |ftop[f]-1| in the |font_num|

-table and the |internal_num| array gives the corresponding internal font

-numbers.  If such an internal font number~|i| does not correspond to

-some font occuring in the \.{DVI} file, then |font_num[i]| has not been

-assigned a meaningful value; this is indicated by |local_only[i]=true|.

-

-If font~|f| is not virtual, then |fbase[f]=0| and |ftop[f]=0|.  The |start_cmd|

-values are ignored in this case.

-

-@d char_width(A,B) mpx->width[mpx->info_base[(A)]+(B)]

-@d start_cmd(A,B) mpx->cmd_ptr[mpx->info_base[(A)]+(B)]

-

-@<Glob...@>=

-web_integer font_num[(max_fnums+1)]; /* external font numbers */

-web_integer internal_num[(max_fnums+1)]; /* internal font numbers */

-web_boolean local_only[(max_fnums+1)]; /* |font_num| meaningless? */

-char *font_name[(max_fonts+1)]; /* starting positions of external font names */

-double font_scaled_size[(max_fonts+1)]; /* scale factors over $2^{20}$ */

-double font_design_size[(max_fonts+1)]; /* design sizes over $2^{20}$ */

-web_integer font_check_sum[(max_fonts+1)];  /* check sum from the |font_def| */

-web_integer font_bc[(max_fonts+1)]; /* beginning characters in fonts */

-web_integer font_ec[(max_fonts+1)]; /* ending characters in fonts */

-web_integer info_base[(max_fonts+1)]; /* index into |width| and |cmd_ptr| tables */

-web_integer width[(max_widths+1)];

-  /* character widths, in units $2^{-20}$ of design size */

-web_integer fbase[(max_fonts+1)]; /* index into |font_num| for local fonts */

-web_integer ftop[(max_fonts+1)];  /* |font_num| index where local fonts stop */

-web_integer cmd_ptr[(max_widths+1)]; /* starting positions in |cmd_buf| */

-unsigned int nfonts; /* the number of known fonts */

-unsigned int vf_ptr;  /* next |font_num| entry for virtual font font tables */

-unsigned int info_ptr; /* allocation pointer for |width| and |cmd_ptr| tables */

-unsigned int n_cmds; /* number of occupied cells in |cmd_buf| */

-unsigned int cur_fbase, cur_ftop;

-  /* currently applicable part of the |font_num| table */

-

-@ @<Set init...@>=

-mpx->nfonts=0; mpx->info_ptr=0; mpx->font_name[0]=0;

-mpx->vf_ptr=max_fnums;

-mpx->cur_fbase=0; mpx->cur_ftop=0;

-

-@ Printing the name of a given font is easy except that a procedure |print_char|

-is needed to actually send an |ASCII_code| to the \.{MPX} file.

-

-@c @<Declare subroutines for printing strings@>@;

-static void mpx_print_font (MPX mpx, web_integer f) { /* |f| is an internal font number */

-  if ( (f<0)||(f>=(int)mpx->nfonts) ) {

-    bad_dvi("Undefined font");

-  } else { 

-    char *s = mpx->font_name[f];

-    while (*s) {

-      mpx_print_char(mpx,(unsigned char)*s);

-      s++;

-    }

-  }

-}

-

-@ Sometimes a font name is needed as part of an error message.

-

-@d font_warn(A,B)  mpx_warn (mpx,"%s %s",A,mpx->font_name[(B)])

-@d font_error(A,B) mpx_error(mpx,"%s %s",A,mpx->font_name[(B)])

-@d font_abort(A,B) mpx_abort(mpx,"%s %s",A,mpx->font_name[(B)])

-

-

-@ When we encounter a font definition, we save the name, checksum, and size

-information, but we don't actually read the \.{TFM} or \.{VF} file until we

-are about to use the font.  If a matching font is not already defined, we then

-allocate a new internal font number.

-

-The following subroutine does the necessary things when a \\{fnt\_def} command

-is encountered in the \.{DVI} file or in a \.{VF} file.  It assumes that the

-first argument has already been parsed and is given by the parameter~|e|.

-

-@c @<Declare a function called |match_font|@>@;

-static void mpx_define_font (MPX mpx, web_integer e) { /* |e| is an external font number */

-  unsigned i; /* index into |font_num| and |internal_num| */

-  web_integer n; /* length of the font name and area */

-  web_integer k; /* general purpose loop counter */

-  web_integer x;  /* a temporary value for scaled size computation */

-  if ( mpx->nfonts==max_fonts ) 

-    mpx_abort(mpx,"DVItoMP capacity exceeded (max fonts=%d)!", max_fonts);

-@.DVItoMP capacity exceeded...@>

-  @<Allocate an index |i| into the |font_num| and |internal_num| tables@>;

-  @<Read the font parameters into position for font |nf|@>;

-  mpx->internal_num[i]=mpx_match_font(mpx, mpx->nfonts,true);

-  if ( mpx->internal_num[i]==(int)mpx->nfonts ) {

-    mpx->info_base[mpx->nfonts]=max_widths; /* indicate that the info isn't loaded yet */

-    mpx->local_only[mpx->nfonts]=mpx->vf_reading; incr(mpx->nfonts);

-  }

-}

-

-@ @<Allocate an index |i| into the |font_num| and |internal_num| tables@>=

-if ( mpx->vf_ptr==mpx->nfonts ) 

-  mpx_abort(mpx,"DVItoMP capacity exceeded (max font numbers=%d)",  max_fnums);

-@.DVItoMP capacity exceeded...@>

-if ( mpx->vf_reading ) { 

-  mpx->font_num[mpx->nfonts]=0; i=mpx->vf_ptr; decr(mpx->vf_ptr);

-} else {

-  i=mpx->nfonts;

-}

-mpx->font_num[i]=e

-

-@ @<Read the font parameters into position for font |nf|@>=

-mpx->font_check_sum[mpx->nfonts]=mpx_signed_quad(mpx);

-@<Read |font_scaled_size[nf]| and |font_design_size[nf]|@>;

-n=mpx_get_byte(mpx);  /* that is the area */

-n=n+mpx_get_byte(mpx);

-mpx->font_name[mpx->nfonts]=xmalloc((size_t)(n+1),1);

-for (k=0;k<n;k++)

-   mpx->font_name[mpx->nfonts][k]=mpx_get_byte(mpx);

-mpx->font_name[mpx->nfonts][k]=0

-

-@ The scaled size and design size are stored in \.{DVI} units divided by $2^{20}$.

-The units for scaled size are a little different if we are reading a virtual

-font, but this will be corrected when the scaled size is used.  The scaled size

-also needs to be truncated to at most 23 significant bits in order to make

-the character width calculation match what \TeX\ does.

-

-@<Read |font_scaled_size[nf]| and |font_design_size[nf]|@>=

-x=mpx_signed_quad(mpx);

-k=1;

-while ( mpx->x>040000000 ) { 

-  x= x / 2; k=k+k;

-}

-mpx->font_scaled_size[mpx->nfonts]=x*k/1048576.0;

-if ( mpx->vf_reading )

-  mpx->font_design_size[mpx->nfonts]=mpx_signed_quad(mpx)*mpx->dvi_per_fix/1048576.0;

-else mpx->font_design_size[mpx->nfonts]=mpx_signed_quad(mpx)/1048576.0;

-

-@ @<Glob...@>=

-double dvi_per_fix; /* converts points scaled $2^{20}$ to \.{DVI} units */

-

-@ The |match_font| function tries to find a match for the font with internal

-number~|ff|, returning |nf| or the number of the matching font.  If

-|exact=true|, the name and scaled size should match.  Otherwise the scaled

-size need not match but the font found must be already loaded, not just

-defined.

-

-@<Declare a function called |match_font|@>=

-static web_integer mpx_match_font (MPX mpx, unsigned ff, web_boolean  exact) {

-  unsigned f; /* font number being tested */

-  for (f=0; f<mpx->nfonts ; f++) {

-    if ( f!=ff ) {

-      @<Compare the names of fonts |f| and |ff|; |continue| if they differ@>;

-      if ( exact ) {

-        if ( fabs(mpx->font_scaled_size[f]-mpx->font_scaled_size[ff])<= font_tolerance ) {

-          if ( ! mpx->vf_reading ) {

-            if ( mpx->local_only[f] ) {

-              mpx->font_num[f]=mpx->font_num[ff]; mpx->local_only[f]=false;

-            } else if ( mpx->font_num[f]!=mpx->font_num[ff] ) {

-              continue;

-            }

-          }

-          break;

-        }

-      } else if ( mpx->info_base[f]!=max_widths ) {

-        break;

-      }

-    }

-  }

-  if ( f<mpx->nfonts ) {

-    @<Make sure fonts |f| and |ff| have matching design sizes and checksums@>;

-  }

-  return (web_integer)f;

-}

-

-@ @<Compare the names of fonts |f| and |ff|; |continue| if they differ@>=

-if (strcmp(mpx->font_name[f],mpx->font_name[ff]))

-   continue

-

-@ @<Make sure fonts |f| and |ff| have matching design sizes and checksums@>=

-if ( fabs(mpx->font_design_size[f]-mpx->font_design_size[ff]) > font_tolerance ) {

-  font_error("Inconsistent design sizes given for ",ff);

-@.Inconsistent design sizes@>

-} else if ( mpx->font_check_sum[f]!=mpx->font_check_sum[ff] ) {

-  font_warn("Checksum mismatch for ", ff);

-@.Checksum mismatch@>

-}

-

-@* Reading ordinary fonts.

-An auxiliary array |in_width| is used to hold the widths as they are

-input. The global variable |tfm_check_sum| is set to the check sum that

-appears in the current \.{TFM} file.

-

-@<Glob...@>=

-web_integer in_width[256]; /* \.{TFM} width data in \.{DVI} units */

-web_integer tfm_check_sum; /* check sum found in |tfm_file| */

-

-@ Here is a procedure that absorbs the necessary information from a

-\.{TFM} file, assuming that the file has just been successfully reset

-so that we are ready to read its first byte. (A complete description of

-\.{TFM} file format appears in the documentation of \.{TFtoPL} and will

-not be repeated here.) The procedure does not check the \.{TFM} file

-for validity, nor does it give explicit information about what is

-wrong with a \.{TFM} file that proves to be invalid. The procedure simply

-aborts the program if it detects anything amiss in the \.{TFM} data.

-

-@c 

-static void mpx_in_TFM (MPX mpx,web_integer f) {

-  /* input \.{TFM} data for font |f| or abort */

-  web_integer k; /* index for loops */

-  int lh; /* length of the header data, in four-byte words */

-  int nw; /* number of words in the width table */

-  unsigned wp; /* new value of |info_ptr| after successful input */

-  @<Read past the header data; |abort| if there is a problem@>;

-  @<Store character-width indices at the end of the |width| table@>;

-  @<Read the width values into the |in_width| table@>;

-  @<Move the widths from |in_width| to |width|@>;

-  mpx->fbase[f]=0; mpx->ftop[f]=0;

-  mpx->info_ptr=wp;

-  return;

-}

-

-@ @<Read past the header...@>=

-mpx_read_tfm_word(mpx); lh=mpx->b2*(int)(256)+mpx->b3;

-mpx_read_tfm_word(mpx); 

-mpx->font_bc[f]=mpx->b0*(int)(256)+mpx->b1; 

-mpx->font_ec[f]=mpx->b2*(int)(256)+mpx->b3;

-if ( mpx->font_ec[f]<mpx->font_bc[f] ) mpx->font_bc[f]=mpx->font_ec[f]+1;

-if ( mpx->info_ptr+mpx->font_ec[f]-mpx->font_bc[f]+1>max_widths )

-  mpx_abort(mpx,"DVItoMP capacity exceeded (width table size=%d)!",max_widths);

-@.DVItoMP capacity exceeded...@>

-wp=mpx->info_ptr+mpx->font_ec[f]-mpx->font_bc[f]+1;

-mpx_read_tfm_word(mpx); nw=mpx->b0*256+mpx->b1;

-if ( (nw==0)||(nw>256) ) 

-  font_abort("Bad TFM file for ",f);

-@.Bad TFM file@>

-for (k=1;k<=3+lh;k++) { 

-  if ( feof(mpx->tfm_file) )

-    font_abort("Bad TFM file for ",f);

-@.Bad TFM file@>

-  mpx_read_tfm_word(mpx);

-  if ( k==4 ) {

-    if ( mpx->b0<128 ) 

-      mpx->tfm_check_sum=((mpx->b0*(int)(256)+mpx->b1)*256+mpx->b2)*256+mpx->b3;

-    else 

-      mpx->tfm_check_sum=(((mpx->b0-256)*(int)(256)+mpx->b1)*256+mpx->b2)*256+mpx->b3;

-  }

-  if ( k==5 ) {

-    if (mpx->mode == mpx_troff_mode) {

-      mpx->font_design_size[f]=(((mpx->b0*(int)(256)+mpx->b1)*256+mpx->b2)*256+mpx->b3)/(65536.0*16);

-    }

-  }

-}

-

-@ @<Store character-width indices...@>=

-if ( wp>0 ) {

-  for (k=(int)mpx->info_ptr;k<=(int)wp-1;k++ ) {

-    mpx_read_tfm_word(mpx);

-    if ( mpx->b0>nw ) 

-      font_abort("Bad TFM file for ",f);

-@.Bad TFM file@>

-    mpx->width[k]=mpx->b0;

-  }

-}

-

-@ No fancy width calculation is needed here because \.{DVItoMP} stores

-widths in their raw form as multiples of the design size scaled by $2^{20}$.

-The |font_scaled_size| entries have been computed so that the final width

-compution can be done in floating point if enough precision is available.

-

-@<Read the width values into the |in_width| table@>=

-for (k=0;k<=nw-1;k++) { 

-  mpx_read_tfm_word(mpx);

-  if ( mpx->b0>127 ) mpx->b0=mpx->b0-256;

-  mpx->in_width[k]=((mpx->b0*0400+mpx->b1)*0400+mpx->b2)*0400+mpx->b3;

-}

-

-@ The width compution uses a scale factor |dvi_scale| that will be introduced

-later.  It is equal to one when not typesetting a character from a virtual

-font.  In that case, the following expressions do the width computation that is

-so important in \.{DVItype}.  It is less important here because it is impractical

-to guarantee precise character positioning in \MP\ output.  Nevertheless, the

-width compution will be precise if reals have at least 46-bit mantissas and

-|round(x-.5)| is equivalent to $\lfloor x\rfloor$.  It may be a good idea to

-modify this computation if these conditions are not met.

-@^system dependencies@>

-

-@<Width of character |c| in font |f|@>=

-floor(mpx->dvi_scale*mpx->font_scaled_size[f]*char_width(f,c))

-

-@ @<Width of character |p| in font |cur_font|@>=

-floor(mpx->dvi_scale*mpx->font_scaled_size[cur_font]*char_width(cur_font,p))

-

-@ @<Move the widths from |in_width| to |width|@>=

-if ( mpx->in_width[0]!=0 )

-  font_abort("Bad TFM file for ",f);  /* the first width should be zero */

-@.Bad TFM file@>

-mpx->info_base[f]=(int)(mpx->info_ptr-mpx->font_bc[f]);

-if ( wp>0 ) {

-  for (k=(int)mpx->info_ptr;k<=(int)wp-1;k++) {

-    mpx->width[k]=mpx->in_width[mpx->width[k]];

-  }

-}

-

-

-@* Reading virtual fonts.

-

-The |in_VF| procedure absorbs the necessary information from a \.{VF} file that

-has just been reset so that we are ready to read the first byte.  (A complete

-description of \.{VF} file format appears in the documention of \.{VFtoVP}).

-Like |in_TFM|, this procedure simply aborts the program if it detects anything

-wrong with the \.{VF} file.

-

-@c 

-@<Declare a function called |first_par|@>@;

-static void mpx_in_VF (MPX mpx, web_integer f) {

-  /* read \.{VF} data for font |f| or abort */

-  web_integer p; /* a byte from the \.{VF} file */

-  boolean was_vf_reading; /* old value of |vf_reading| */

-  web_integer c; /* the current character code */

-  web_integer limit; /* space limitations force character codes to be less than this */

-  web_integer w; /* a \.{TFM} width being read */

-  was_vf_reading=mpx->vf_reading; mpx->vf_reading=true;

-  @<Start reading the preamble from a \.{VF} file@>;@/

-  @<Initialize the data structures for the virtual font@>;@/

-  p=mpx_get_byte(mpx);

-  while ( p>=fnt_def1 ) { 

-    if ( p>fnt_def1+3 ) 

-      font_abort("Bad VF file for ",f);

-    mpx_define_font(mpx, mpx_first_par(mpx, (unsigned int)p));

-    p=mpx_get_byte(mpx);

-  }

-  while ( p<=242 ) { 

-    if ( feof(mpx->vf_file) ) 

-      font_abort("Bad VF file for ",f);

-    @<Read the packet length, character code, and \.{TFM} width@>;

-    @<Store the character packet in |cmd_buf|@>;

-    p=mpx_get_byte(mpx);

-  }

-  if ( p==post ) { 

-    @<Finish setting up the data structures for the new virtual font@>;

-    mpx->vf_reading=was_vf_reading;

-    return;

-  }

-}

-

-@ @<Start reading the preamble from a \.{VF} file@>=

-p=mpx_get_byte(mpx);

-if ( p!=pre ) 

-  font_abort("Bad VF file for ",f);

-p=mpx_get_byte(mpx); /* fetch the identification byte */

-if ( p!=202 )

-  font_abort("Bad VF file for ",f);

-p=mpx_get_byte(mpx); /* fetch the length of the introductory comment */

-while ( p-->0 ) 

-  (void)mpx_get_byte(mpx);

-mpx->tfm_check_sum=mpx_signed_quad(mpx);

-(void)mpx_signed_quad(mpx); /* skip over the design size */

-

-@ @<Initialize the data structures for the virtual font@>=

-mpx->ftop[f]=(web_integer)mpx->vf_ptr;

-if ( mpx->vf_ptr==mpx->nfonts ) 

-  mpx_abort(mpx,"DVItoMP capacity exceeded (max font numbers=%d)", max_fnums);

-@.DVItoMP capacity exceeded...@>

-decr(mpx->vf_ptr);

-mpx->info_base[f]=(web_integer)mpx->info_ptr;

-limit=max_widths-mpx->info_base[f];@/

-mpx->font_bc[f]=limit; mpx->font_ec[f]=0

-

-@ @<Read the packet length, character code, and \.{TFM} width@>=

-if ( p==242 ) { 

-  p=mpx_signed_quad(mpx); c=mpx_signed_quad(mpx); w=mpx_signed_quad(mpx);

-  if ( c<0 ) 

-    font_abort("Bad VF file for ",f);

-} else { 

-  c=mpx_get_byte(mpx); w=mpx_get_three_bytes(mpx);

-}

-if ( c>=limit )

-  mpx_abort(mpx,"DVItoMP capacity exceeded (max widths=%d)", max_widths);

-@.DVItoMP capacity exceeded...@>

-if ( c<mpx->font_bc[f] ) mpx->font_bc[f]=c;

-if ( c>mpx->font_ec[f] ) mpx->font_ec[f]=c;

-char_width(f,c)=w

-

-@ @<Store the character packet in |cmd_buf|@>=

-if ( mpx->n_cmds+p>=virtual_space )

-  mpx_abort(mpx,"DVItoMP capacity exceeded (virtual font space=%d)",virtual_space);

-@.DVItoMP capacity exceeded...@>

-start_cmd(f,c)=(web_integer)mpx->n_cmds;

-while ( p>0 ) { 

-  mpx->cmd_buf[mpx->n_cmds]=(unsigned char)mpx_get_byte(mpx);

-  incr(mpx->n_cmds); decr(p);

-}

-mpx->cmd_buf[mpx->n_cmds]=eop; /* add the end-of-packet marker */

-incr(mpx->n_cmds)

-

-@ There are unused |width| and |cmd_ptr| entries if |font_bc[f]>0| but it isn't

-worthwhile to slide everything down just to save a little space.

-

-@<Finish setting up the data structures for the new virtual font@>=

-mpx->fbase[f]=(web_integer)(mpx->vf_ptr+1);

-mpx->info_ptr=(unsigned int)(mpx->info_base[f]+mpx->font_ec[f]+1)

-

-

-@* Loading fonts.

-

-The character width information for a font is loaded when the font is selected

-for the first time.  This information might already be loaded if the font has

-already been used at a different scale factor.  Otherwise, we look for a \.{VF}

-file, or failing that, a \.{TFM} file.  All this is done by the |select_font|

-function that takes an external font number~|e| and returns the corresponding

-internal font number with the width information loaded.

-

-@c 

-static web_integer mpx_select_font (MPX mpx, web_integer e) {

-  int f; /* the internal font number */

-  int ff; /* internal font number for an existing version */

-  web_integer k; /* general purpose loop counter */

-  @<Set |f| to the internal font number that corresponds to |e|,

-    or |abort| if there is none@>;

-  if ( mpx->info_base[f]==max_widths ) {

-    ff=mpx_match_font(mpx, (unsigned)f,false);

-    if ( ff<(int)mpx->nfonts ) {

-      @<Make font |f| refer to the width information from font |ff|@>;

-    } else { 

-      @<Move the \.{VF} file name into the |cur_name| string@>;

-      if ( mpx_open_vf_file(mpx) )  {

-        mpx_in_VF(mpx, f);

-      } else { 

-        if ( ! mpx_open_tfm_file(mpx) )

-          font_abort("No TFM file found for ",f);

-@.no TFM file found@>

-        mpx_in_TFM(mpx, f);

-      }

-      @<Make sure the checksum in the font file matches the one given in the

-        |font_def| for font |f|@>;

-    }

-    @<Do any other initialization required for the new font |f|@>;

-  }

-  return f;

-}

-

-@ @<Set |f| to the internal font number that corresponds to |e|,...@>=

-if ( mpx->cur_ftop<=mpx->nfonts ) 

-  mpx->cur_ftop=mpx->nfonts;

-mpx->font_num[mpx->cur_ftop]=e;

-k=(web_integer)mpx->cur_fbase;

-while ((mpx->font_num[k]!=e)|| mpx->local_only[k] ) incr(k);

-if ( k==(int)mpx->cur_ftop ) 

-  mpx_abort(mpx,"Undefined font selected");

-f=mpx->internal_num[k]

-

-@ @<Make font |f| refer to the width information from font |ff|@>=

-{ 

-  mpx->font_bc[f]=mpx->font_bc[ff];

-  mpx->font_ec[f]=mpx->font_ec[ff];

-  mpx->info_base[f]=mpx->info_base[ff];

-  mpx->fbase[f]=mpx->fbase[ff];

-  mpx->ftop[f]=mpx->ftop[ff];

-}

-

-@ The string |cur_name| is supposed to be set to the external name of the

-\.{VF} file for the current font. 

-@^system dependencies@>

-

-@<Move the \.{VF} file name into the |cur_name| string@>=

-mpx->cur_name = xstrdup (mpx->font_name[f])

-

-@ @<Make sure the checksum in the font file matches the one given in the...@>=

-{ 

-  if ( (mpx->font_check_sum[f]!=0)&&(mpx->tfm_check_sum!=0)&&@|

-       (mpx->font_check_sum[f]!=mpx->tfm_check_sum) ) {

-    font_warn("Checksum mismatch for ",f);

-@.Checksum mismatch@>

-  }

-}

-

-@* Low level output routines.

-

-One of the basic output operations is to write a \MP\ string expression for

-a sequence of characters to be typeset.  The main difficulties are that such

-strings can contain arbitrary eight-bit bytes and there is no fixed limit on

-the length of the string that needs to be produced.  In extreme cases this

-can lead to expressions such as

-$$\vcenter{

-    \hbox{\.{char7\&char15\&char31\&"?FWayzz"}}

-    \hbox{\.{\&"zzaF"\&char15\&char3\&char31}}

-    \hbox{\.{\&"Nxzzzzzzzwvtsqo"}}}

-$$

-

-@ A global variable |state| keeps track of the output process.

-When |state=normal| we have begun a quoted string and the next character

-should be a printable character or a closing quote.  When |state=special|

-the last thing printed was a ``\.{char}'' construction or a closing quote

-and an ampersand should come next.  The starting condition |state=initial|

-is a lot like |state=special|, except no ampersand is required.

-

-@d special 0 /* the |state| after printing a ``\.{char}'' expression */

-@d normal 1 /* the |state| value in a quoted string */

-@d initial 2 /* initial |state| */

-

-@<Glob...@>=

-int state; /* controls the process of printing a string */

-int print_col; /* there are at most this many characters on the current line */

-

-@ @<Set initial values@>=

-mpx->state = initial;

-mpx->print_col = 0;		/* there are at most this many characters on the current line */

-

-@ To print a string on the \.{MPX} file, initialize |print_col|, ensure that

-|state=initial|, and pass the characters one-at-a-time to |print_char|.

-

-@<Declare subroutines for printing strings@>=

-static void mpx_print_char (MPX mpx, unsigned char c) {

-  web_integer l; /* number of characters to print |c| or the \.{char} expression */  

-  if ( printable(c) ) l=1;

-  else if ( c<10 ) l=5;

-  else if ( c<100 ) l=6;

-  else l=7;

-  if ( mpx->print_col+l>line_length-2 ) { 

-    if ( mpx->state==normal ) { 

-      fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,"\""); mpx->state=special;

-    }

-    fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,"\n");

-    mpx->print_col=0;

-  }

-  @<Print |c| and update |state| and |print_col|@>;

-}

-

-@ @<Print |c| and update |state| and |print_col|@>=

-if ( mpx->state==normal ) {

-  if ( printable(c) ) {

-    fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,"%c",xchr(c));

-  } else { 

-    fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,"\"&char%d",c);

-    mpx->print_col +=2;

-  }

-} else { 

-  if ( mpx->state==special ) { 

-    fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,"&");

-    incr(mpx->print_col);

-  }

-  if ( printable(c) ) { 

-    fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,"\"%c",xchr(c)); 

-    incr(mpx->print_col);

-  } else { 

-    fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,"char%d",c);

-  }

-}

-mpx->print_col += l;

-if ( printable(c) ) 

-  mpx->state=normal; 

-else 

-  mpx->state=special

-

-@ The |end_char_string| procedure gets the string ended properly and ensures

-that there is room for |l| more characters on the output line.

-

-@<Declare subroutines for printing strings@>=

-static void mpx_end_char_string (MPX mpx,web_integer l) { 

-  while ( mpx->state>special ){ 

-    fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,"\"");

-    incr(mpx->print_col);

-    decr(mpx->state);

-  }

-  if ( mpx->print_col+l>line_length ) { 

-    fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,"\n "); mpx->print_col=0;

-  }

-  mpx->state=initial; /* get ready to print the next string */

-}

-

-@ Since |end_char_string| resets |state:=initial|, all we have to do is set

-|state:=initial| once at the beginning.

-

-@<Set init...@>=

-mpx->state=initial;

-

-@ Characters and rules are positioned according to global variables |h| and~|v|

-as will be explained later.  We also need scale factors that convert quantities

-to the right units when they are printed in the \.{MPX} file.

-

-Even though all variable names in the \MP\ output are made local via \.{save}

-commands, it is still desirable to preceed them with underscores.  This makes

-the output more likely to work when used in a macro definition, since the

-generated variables names must not collide with formal parameters in such

-cases.

-

-@<Glob...@>=

-web_integer h;

-web_integer v; /* the current position in \.{DVI} units */

-double conv; /* converts \.{DVI} units to \MP\ points */

-double mag; /* magnification factor times 1000 */

-

-@ @c @<Declare a procedure called |finish_last_char|@>@;

-static void mpx_do_set_char (MPX mpx,web_integer f, web_integer c) {

-  if ( (c<mpx->font_bc[f])||(c>mpx->font_ec[f]) )

-    mpx_abort(mpx,"attempt to typeset invalid character %d",c);

-@.attempt to typeset...@>

-  if ((mpx->h!=mpx->str_h2)||(mpx->v!=mpx->str_v)||

-      (f!=mpx->str_f)||(mpx->dvi_scale!=mpx->str_scale) ) {

-    if ( mpx->str_f>=0 ) {

-      mpx_finish_last_char(mpx);

-    } else if ( ! mpx->fonts_used ) {

-      @<Prepare to output the first character on a page@>;

-    }

-    if ( ! mpx->font_used[f] )

-      @<Prepare to use font |f| for the first time on a page@>;

-    fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,"_s("); mpx->print_col=3;@/

-    mpx->str_scale=mpx->dvi_scale; mpx->str_f=f; 

-    mpx->str_v=mpx->v; mpx->str_h1=mpx->h;

-  }

-  mpx_print_char(mpx, (unsigned char)c);

-  mpx->str_h2=(web_integer)(mpx->h+@<Width of character |c| in font |f|@>);

-}

-

-@ @<Glob...@>=

-boolean font_used[(max_fonts+1)]; /* has this font been used on this page? */

-boolean fonts_used; /* has any font been used on this page? */

-boolean rules_used; /* has any rules been set on this page? */

-web_integer str_h1;

-web_integer str_v; /* starting position for current output string */

-web_integer str_h2; /* where the current output string ends */

-web_integer str_f; /* internal font number for the current output string */

-double str_scale; /* value of |dvi_scale| for the current output string */

-

-

-@ Before using any fonts we need to define a MetaPost macro for

-typesetting character strings. The |font_used| array is not

-initialized until it is actually time to output a character.

-

-@<Declarations@>=

-static void mpx_prepare_font_use(MPX mpx);

-

-@ @c

-static void mpx_prepare_font_use(MPX mpx) {

-  unsigned k;

-  for (k=0; k<mpx->nfonts;k++ )

-    mpx->font_used[k]=false;

-  mpx->fonts_used=true;

-  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,"string _n[];\n");

-  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,"vardef _s(expr _t,_f,_m,_x,_y)(text _c)=\n");

-  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,

-          "  addto _p also _t infont _f scaled _m shifted (_x,_y) _c; enddef;\n");

-}

-

-@ @<Prepare to output the first character on a page@>=

-mpx_prepare_font_use(mpx)

-

-

-@ @<Do any other initialization required for the new font |f|@>=

-mpx->font_used[f]=false;

-

-@ Do what is necessary when the font with internal number f is used for the

-first time on a page.

-

-@<Declarations@>=

-static void mpx_first_use(MPX mpx, int f) ;

-

-@ @c 

-static void mpx_first_use(MPX mpx, int f) {

-  mpx->font_used[f]=true;

-  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,"_n%d=",f);

-  mpx->print_col=6;

-  mpx_print_font(mpx, f);

-  mpx_end_char_string(mpx, 1);

-  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,";\n");

-}

-

-@ @<Prepare to use font |f| for the first time on a page@>=

-mpx_first_use(mpx,f);

-

-@ We maintain the invariant that |str_f=-1| when there is no output string

-under construction.

-

-@<Declare a procedure called |finish_last_char|@>=

-static void mpx_finish_last_char (MPX mpx) {

-  double m,x,y;

-  /* font scale factor and \MP\ coordinates of reference point */

-  if ( mpx->str_f>=0 ) {

-    if (mpx->mode==mpx_tex_mode) {

-      m=mpx->str_scale*mpx->font_scaled_size[mpx->str_f]*

-         mpx->mag/mpx->font_design_size[mpx->str_f];

-      x=mpx->conv*mpx->str_h1; 

-      y=mpx->conv*(-mpx->str_v);

-      if ( (fabs(x)>=4096.0)||(fabs(y)>=4096.0)||(m>=4096.0)||(m<0) ) { 

-        mpx_warn(mpx,"text is out of range");

-        mpx_end_char_string(mpx, 60);

-      } else {

-        mpx_end_char_string(mpx, 40);

-      }

-      fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,",_n%d,%1.5f,%1.4f,%1.4f,",mpx->str_f,m,x,y);

-      @<Print a \.{withcolor} specifier if appropriate@>@/

-      fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,");\n");

-    } else {

-      m = mpx->str_size / mpx->font_design_size[mpx->str_f];

-      x = mpx->dmp_str_h1 * mpx->unit;

-      y = YCORR - mpx->dmp_str_v * mpx->unit;

-      if (fabs(x) >= 4096.0 || fabs(y) >= 4096.0 || m >= 4096.0 || m < 0) {

-        mpx_warn(mpx,"text out of range ignored");

-        mpx_end_char_string(mpx,67);

-      } else {

-        mpx_end_char_string(mpx,47);

-      }

-      fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, "), _n%d", mpx->str_f);

-      fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, ",%.5f,%.4f,%.4f)", (m*1.00375), (x/100.0), y);

-      mpx_slant_and_ht(mpx);

-      fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, ";\n");

-    }

-    mpx->str_f=-1;

-  }

-}

-

-@ Setting rules is fairly simple.

-

-@c 

-static void mpx_do_set_rule (MPX mpx,web_integer ht, web_integer wd) {

-  double xx1,yy1,xx2,yy2,ww;

-  /* \MP\ coordinates of lower-left and upper-right corners */

-  if ( wd==1 ) {

-    @<Handle a special rule that determines the box size@>

-  } else if ( (ht>0)||(wd>0) ) { 

-    if ( mpx->str_f>=0 )

-      mpx_finish_last_char(mpx);

-    if ( ! mpx->rules_used ) {

-      mpx->rules_used=true;

-      fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,

-             "interim linecap:=0;\n"

-             "vardef _r(expr _a,_w)(text _t) =\n"

-             "  addto _p doublepath _a withpen pencircle scaled _w _t enddef;");

-    }

-    @<Make |(xx1,yy1)| and |(xx2,yy2)| then ends of the desired penstroke

-      and |ww| the desired stroke width@>;

-    if ( (fabs(xx1)>=4096.0)||(fabs(yy1)>=4096.0)||@|

-        (fabs(xx2)>=4096.0)||(fabs(yy2)>=4096.0)||(ww>=4096.0) )

-      mpx_warn(mpx,"hrule or vrule is out of range");

-    fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,"_r((%1.4f,%1.4f)..(%1.4f,%1.4f), %1.4f,",xx1,yy1,xx2,yy2,ww);

-    @<Print a \.{withcolor} specifier if appropriate@>@/

-    fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,");\n");

-  }

-}

-

-@ @<Make |(xx1,yy1)| and |(xx2,yy2)| then ends of the desired penstroke...@>=

-xx1=mpx->conv*mpx->h;

-yy1=mpx->conv*(-mpx->v);

-if ( wd>ht ){ 

-  xx2=xx1+mpx->conv*wd;

-  ww=mpx->conv*ht;

-  yy1=yy1+0.5*ww;

-  yy2=yy1;

-} else { 

-  yy2=yy1+mpx->conv*ht;

-  ww=mpx->conv*wd;

-  xx1=xx1+0.5*ww;

-  xx2=xx1;

-}

-

-@ Rules of width one dvi unit are not typeset since \.{MPtoTeX} adds an

-extraneous rule of this width in order to allow \.{DVItoMP} to deduce the

-dimensions of the boxes it ships out.  The box width is the left edge of the

-last such rule; the height and depth are at the top and bottom of the rule.

-There should be only one special rule per picture but there could be more if

-the user tries to typeset his own one-dvi-unit rules.  In this case the

-dimension-determining rule is the last one in the picture.

-

-@<Handle a special rule that determines the box size@>=

-{ 

-  mpx->pic_wd=mpx->h; mpx->pic_dp=mpx->v; mpx->pic_ht=ht-mpx->v; 

-}

-

-@ @<Glob...@>=

-web_integer pic_dp; web_integer pic_ht; web_integer pic_wd; /* picture dimensions from special rule */

-

-@ The following  initialization and clean-up is required.  We do a little more

-initialization than is absolutely necessary since some compilers might complain

-if the variables are uninitialized when |do_set_char| tests them.

-

-@c 

-static void mpx_start_picture (MPX mpx) { 

-  mpx->fonts_used=false;

-  mpx->rules_used=false;

-  mpx->graphics_used=false;

-  mpx->str_f=-1;

-  mpx->str_v=0;

-  mpx->str_h2=0;

-  mpx->str_scale=1.0; /* values don't matter */

-  mpx->dmp_str_v = 0.0;

-  mpx->dmp_str_h2 = 0.0;

-  mpx->str_size = 0.0;

-  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,

-          "begingroup save %s_p,_r,_s,_n; picture _p; _p=nullpicture;\n", 

-          (mpx->mode == mpx_tex_mode ? "" : "_C,_D,"));

-}

-

-static void mpx_stop_picture (MPX mpx) {

-  double w,h,dd; /* width, height, negative depth in PostScript points */

-  if ( mpx->str_f>=0 )

-    mpx_finish_last_char(mpx);

-  if (mpx->mode==mpx_tex_mode) {

-    @<Print a \&{setbounds} command based on picture dimensions@>;

-  }

-  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,"_p endgroup\n");

-}

-

-@ @<Print a \&{setbounds} command based on picture dimensions@>=

-dd=-mpx->pic_dp*mpx->conv;

-w=mpx->conv*mpx->pic_wd; 

-h=mpx->conv*mpx->pic_ht;

-fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,

-        "setbounds _p to (0,%1.4f)--(%1.4f,%1.4f)--\n" 

-        " (%1.4f,%1.4f)--(0,%1.4f)--cycle;\n",dd,w,dd,w,h,h)

-

-@* Translation to symbolic form.

-

-The main work of \.{DVItoMP} is accomplished by the |do_dvi_commands|

-procedure, which produces the output for an entire page, assuming that the

-|bop| command for that page has already been processed. This procedure is

-essentially an interpretive routine that reads and acts on the \.{DVI}

-commands.  It is also capable of executing the typesetting commands for

-a character in a virtual font.

-

-@ The definition of \.{DVI} files refers to six registers,

-$(h,v,w,x,y,z)$, which hold web_integer values in \.{DVI} units.

-These units come directly from the input file except they need to be

-rescaled when typesetting characters from a virtual font.

-The stack of $(h,v,w,x,y,z)$ values is represented by six arrays

-called |hstack|, \dots, |zstack|.

-

-@<Glob...@>=

-web_integer w;web_integer x;web_integer y;web_integer z;

-  /* current state values (|h| and |v| have already been declared) */

-web_integer hstack[(stack_size+1)];

-web_integer vstack[(stack_size+1)];

-web_integer wstack[(stack_size+1)];

-web_integer xstack[(stack_size+1)];

-web_integer ystack[(stack_size+1)];

-web_integer zstack[(stack_size+1)]; /* pushed down values in \.{DVI} units */

-web_integer stk_siz; /* the current stack size */

-double dvi_scale; /* converts units of current input source to \.{DVI} units */

-

-@ @<Do initialization required before starting a new page@>=

-mpx->dvi_scale=1.0;

-mpx->stk_siz=0;

-mpx->h=0; mpx->v=0;

-mpx->Xslant = 0.0; mpx->Xheight = 0.0

-

-@ Next, we need procedures to handle |push| and |pop| commands.

-

-@c @<Declare procedures to handle color commands@>

-static void mpx_do_push (MPX mpx) {

-  if ( mpx->stk_siz==stack_size )

-    mpx_abort(mpx,"DVItoMP capacity exceeded (stack size=%d)",stack_size);

-@.DVItoMP capacity exceeded...@>

-  mpx->hstack[mpx->stk_siz]=mpx->h; 

-  mpx->vstack[mpx->stk_siz]=mpx->v; mpx->wstack[mpx->stk_siz]=mpx->w;

-  mpx->xstack[mpx->stk_siz]=mpx->x; 

-  mpx->ystack[mpx->stk_siz]=mpx->y; mpx->zstack[mpx->stk_siz]=mpx->z;

-  incr(mpx->stk_siz);

-}

-

-static void mpx_do_pop (MPX mpx) { 

-  if ( mpx->stk_siz==0 ) 

-    bad_dvi("attempt to pop empty stack");

-  else { 

-    decr(mpx->stk_siz);

-    mpx->h=mpx->hstack[mpx->stk_siz]; 

-    mpx->v=mpx->vstack[mpx->stk_siz]; mpx->w=mpx->wstack[mpx->stk_siz];

-    mpx->x=mpx->xstack[mpx->stk_siz]; 

-    mpx->y=mpx->ystack[mpx->stk_siz]; mpx->z=mpx->zstack[mpx->stk_siz];

-  }

-}

-

-@ The |set_virtual_char| procedure is mutually recursive with 

-|do_dvi_commands|.  This is really a supervisory

-@^recursion@>

-procedure that calls |do_set_char| or adjusts the input source to read

-typesetting commands for a character in a virtual font.

-

-@c 

-static void mpx_do_dvi_commands (MPX mpx);

-static void mpx_set_virtual_char (MPX mpx,web_integer f, web_integer c) {

-  double old_scale; /* original value of |dvi_scale| */

-  unsigned old_buf_ptr; /* original value of the input pointer |buf_ptr| */

-  unsigned old_fbase,old_ftop; /* originally applicable part of the |font_num| table */

-  if ( mpx->fbase[f]==0 )

-    mpx_do_set_char(mpx, f,c);

-  else { 

-    old_fbase=mpx->cur_fbase; old_ftop=mpx->cur_ftop;

-    mpx->cur_fbase=(unsigned int)mpx->fbase[f];

-    mpx->cur_ftop=(unsigned int)mpx->ftop[f];

-    old_scale=mpx->dvi_scale;

-    mpx->dvi_scale=mpx->dvi_scale*mpx->font_scaled_size[f];

-    old_buf_ptr=mpx->buf_ptr;

-    mpx->buf_ptr=(unsigned int)start_cmd(f,c);

-    mpx_do_push(mpx);

-    mpx_do_dvi_commands(mpx);

-    mpx_do_pop(mpx);@/

-    mpx->buf_ptr=old_buf_ptr;

-    mpx->dvi_scale=old_scale;

-    mpx->cur_fbase=old_fbase;

-    mpx->cur_ftop=old_ftop;

-  }

-}

-

-@ Before we get into the details of |do_dvi_commands|, it is convenient to

-consider a simpler routine that computes the first parameter of each

-opcode.

-

-@d four_cases(A) (A): case (A)+1: case (A)+2: case (A)+3

-@d eight_cases(A) four_cases((A)): case four_cases((A)+4)

-@d sixteen_cases(A) eight_cases((A)): case eight_cases((A)+8)

-@d thirty_two_cases(A) sixteen_cases((A)): case sixteen_cases((A)+16)

-@d sixty_four_cases(A) thirty_two_cases((A)): case thirty_two_cases((A)+32)

-

-@<Declare a function called |first_par|@>=

-static web_integer mpx_first_par (MPX mpx, unsigned int o) { 

-  switch (o) {

-  case sixty_four_cases(set_char_0):

-  case sixty_four_cases(set_char_0+64):

-    return (web_integer)(o-set_char_0);

-    break;

-  case set1: case put1: case fnt1: case xxx1: case fnt_def1: 

-    return mpx_get_byte(mpx);

-    break;

-  case set1+1: case put1+1: case fnt1+1: case xxx1+1: case fnt_def1+1: 

-    return mpx_get_two_bytes(mpx);

-    break;

-  case set1+2: case put1+2: case fnt1+2: case xxx1+2: case fnt_def1+2: 

-    return mpx_get_three_bytes(mpx);

-    break;

-  case right1: case w1: case x1: case down1: case y1: case z1: 

-    return mpx_signed_byte(mpx);

-    break;

-  case right1+1: case w1+1: case x1+1: case down1+1: case y1+1: case z1+1: 

-    return mpx_signed_pair(mpx);

-    break;

-  case right1+2: case w1+2: case x1+2: case down1+2: case y1+2: case z1+2: 

-    return mpx_signed_trio(mpx);

-    break;

-  case set1+3: case set_rule: case put1+3: case put_rule: 

-  case right1+3: case w1+3: case x1+3: case down1+3: case y1+3: case z1+3: 

-  case fnt1+3: case xxx1+3: case fnt_def1+3:

-    return mpx_signed_quad(mpx);

-    break;

-  case nop: case bop: case eop: case push: case pop: case pre: case post:

-  case post_post: case undefined_commands: 

-    return 0;

-    break;

-  case w0: return mpx->w; break;

-  case x0: return mpx->x; break;

-  case y0: return mpx->y; break;

-  case z0: return mpx->z; break;

-  case sixty_four_cases(fnt_num_0): 

-    return (web_integer)(o-fnt_num_0);

-    break;

-  }

-  return 0; /* compiler warning */

-}

-

-@ Here is the |do_dvi_commands| procedure.

-

-@c 

-static void mpx_do_dvi_commands (MPX mpx) {

-  unsigned int o; /* operation code of the current command */

-  web_integer p,q; /* parameters of the current command */

-  web_integer cur_font; /* current internal font number */

-  if ( (mpx->cur_fbase<mpx->cur_ftop) && (mpx->buf_ptr<virtual_space) )

-    cur_font=mpx_select_font(mpx, mpx->font_num[mpx->cur_ftop-1]); /* select first local font */

-  else 

-    cur_font=max_fnums+1; /* current font is undefined */

-  mpx->w=0; mpx->x=0; mpx->y=0; mpx->z=0; /* initialize the state variables */

-  while ( true ) {

-    @<Translate the next command in the \.{DVI} file; |return| if it was |eop|@>;

-  }

-}

-

-@ The multiway switch in |first_par|, above, was organized by the length

-of each command; the one in |do_dvi_commands| is organized by the semantics.

-

-@ @<Translate the next command...@>=

-{ 

-  o=(unsigned int)mpx_get_byte(mpx); 

-  p=mpx_first_par(mpx, o);

-  if ( feof(mpx->dvi_file) ) 

-    bad_dvi("the DVI file ended prematurely");

-@.the DVI file ended prematurely@>

-  if ( o<set1+4 ) { /* |set_char_0| through |set_char_127|, |set1| through |set4| */

-    if ( cur_font>max_fnums ) {

-      if ( mpx->vf_reading )

-        mpx_abort(mpx,"no font selected for character %d in virtual font", p);

-      else 

-        bad_dvi_two("no font selected for character %d",p);

-    }

-@.no font selected@>

-    mpx_set_virtual_char(mpx, cur_font,p);

-    mpx->h += @<Width of character |p| in font |cur_font|@>;

-  } else {

-    switch(o) {

-    case four_cases(put1): 

-      mpx_set_virtual_char(mpx, cur_font, p);

-      break;

-    case set_rule: 

-      q=(web_integer)trunc(mpx_signed_quad(mpx)*mpx->dvi_scale);

-      mpx_do_set_rule(mpx, (web_integer)trunc(p*mpx->dvi_scale),q);

-      mpx->h += q;

-      break;

-    case put_rule: 

-      q=(web_integer)trunc(mpx_signed_quad(mpx)*mpx->dvi_scale);

-      mpx_do_set_rule(mpx, (web_integer)trunc(p*mpx->dvi_scale),q);

-      break;

-    @<Additional cases for translating \.{DVI} command |o| with

-       first parameter |p|@>@;

-    case undefined_commands:

-      bad_dvi_two("undefined command %d",o);

-@.undefined command@>

-      break;

-    } /* all cases have been enumerated */

-  }

-}

-

-@ @<Additional cases for translating \.{DVI} command |o|...@>=

-case four_cases(xxx1): 

-  mpx_do_xxx(mpx, p);

-  break;

-case pre: case post: case post_post: 

-  bad_dvi("preamble or postamble within a page!");

-@.preamble or postamble within a page@>

-  break;

-

-@ @<Additional cases for translating \.{DVI} command |o|...@>=

-case nop: 

-  break;

-case bop: 

-  bad_dvi("bop occurred before eop");

-@.bop occurred before eop@>

-  break;

-case eop: 

-  return;

-  break;

-case push: 

-  mpx_do_push(mpx);

-  break;

-case pop: 

-  mpx_do_pop(mpx);

-  break;

-

-@ @<Additional cases for translating \.{DVI} command |o|...@>=

-case four_cases(right1):

-  mpx->h += trunc(p*mpx->dvi_scale);

-  break;

-case w0: case four_cases(w1): 

-  mpx->w = (web_integer)trunc(p*mpx->dvi_scale); mpx->h += mpx->w;

-  break;

-case x0: case four_cases(x1): 

-  mpx->x = (web_integer)trunc(p*mpx->dvi_scale); mpx->h += mpx->x;

-  break;

-case four_cases(down1):

-  mpx->v += trunc(p*mpx->dvi_scale);

-  break;

-case y0: case four_cases(y1): 

-  mpx->y = (web_integer)trunc(p*mpx->dvi_scale); mpx->v += mpx->y;

-  break;

-case z0: case four_cases(z1): 

-  mpx->z = (web_integer)trunc(p*mpx->dvi_scale); mpx->v += mpx->z;

-  break;

-

-@ @<Additional cases for translating \.{DVI} command |o|...@>=

-case sixty_four_cases(fnt_num_0): case four_cases(fnt1):

-  cur_font = mpx_select_font(mpx, p);

-  break;

-case four_cases(fnt_def1): 

-  mpx_define_font(mpx, p);

-  break;

-

-@* The main program.

-Now we are ready to put it all together. This is where \.{DVItoMP} starts,

-and where it ends.

-

-@c 

-static int mpx_dvitomp (MPX mpx, char *dviname) {

-  int k;

-  mpx->dviname = dviname;

-  mpx_open_dvi_file(mpx);

-  @<Process the preamble@>;

-  mpx_open_mpxfile(mpx);

-  if (mpx->banner!=NULL)

-    fprintf (mpx->mpxfile,"%s\n",mpx->banner);

-  while ( true ) { 

-    @<Advance to the next |bop| command@>;

-    for (k=0;k<=10;k++) 

-      (void)mpx_signed_quad(mpx);

-    @<Do initialization required before starting a new page@>;

-    mpx_start_picture(mpx);

-    mpx_do_dvi_commands(mpx);

-    if ( mpx->stk_siz!=0 )

-      bad_dvi("stack not empty at end of page");

-@.stack not empty...@>

-    mpx_stop_picture(mpx);

-    fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,"mpxbreak\n");

-  }

-  if(mpx->dvi_file)

-    mpx_fclose(mpx,mpx->dvi_file);

-  if ( mpx->history<=mpx_cksum_trouble )

-    return 0;

-  else 

-    return mpx->history;

-}

-

-@ The main program needs a few global variables in order to do its work.

-

-@<Glob...@>=

-web_integer k;web_integer p; /* general purpose registers */

-web_integer numerator;web_integer denominator; /* stated conversion ratio */

-

-@ @<Process the preamble@>=

-{

-  int p;

-  p=mpx_get_byte(mpx); /* fetch the first byte */

-  if ( p!=pre ) 

-    bad_dvi("First byte isn""t start of preamble!");

-@.First byte isn't...@>

-  p=mpx_get_byte(mpx); /* fetch the identification byte */

-  if ( p!=id_byte )

-    mpx_warn(mpx,"identification in byte 1 should be %d!", id_byte);

-@.identification...should be n@>

-  @<Compute the conversion factor@>;

-  p=mpx_get_byte(mpx); /* fetch the length of the introductory comment */

-  while (p>0 ){ 

-    decr(p); 

-    (void)mpx_get_byte(mpx);

-  }

-}

-

-@ The conversion factor |conv| is figured as follows: There are exactly

-|n/d| decimicrons per \.{DVI} unit, and 254000 decimicrons per inch,

-and |resolution| pixels per inch. Then we have to adjust this

-by the stated amount of magnification.  No such adjustment is needed for

-|dvi_per_fix| since it is used to convert design sizes.

-

-@<Compute the conversion factor@>=

-mpx->numerator=mpx_signed_quad(mpx); mpx->denominator=mpx_signed_quad(mpx);

-if ( (mpx->numerator<=0)||(mpx->denominator<=0) )

-  bad_dvi("bad scale ratio in preamble");

-@.bad scale ratio@>

-mpx->mag=mpx_signed_quad(mpx)/1000.0;

-if ( mpx->mag<=0.0 ) 

-  bad_dvi("magnification isn't positive");

-@.magnification isn't positive@>

-mpx->conv=(mpx->numerator/254000.0)*(72.0/mpx->denominator)*mpx->mag;

-mpx->dvi_per_fix=(254000.0/mpx->numerator)*(mpx->denominator/72.27)/1048576.0;

-

-@ @<Advance to the next |bop| command@>=

-do {  

-  int p;

-  k=mpx_get_byte(mpx);

-  if ( (k>=fnt_def1)&&(k<fnt_def1+4) ){ 

-    p=mpx_first_par(mpx, (unsigned int)k); 

-    mpx_define_font(mpx, p); k=nop;

-  }

-} while (k==nop);

-if ( k==post ) 

-  break;

-if ( k!=bop ) 

-  bad_dvi("missing bop");

-@.missing bop@>

-

-

-@ Global filenames.

-

-@<Global...@>=

-char *dviname;

-

-@* Color support.

-These changes support \.{dvips}-style ``\.{color push NAME}'' and

-``\.{color pop}'' specials. We store a list of named colors, sorted by

-name, and decorate the relevant drawing commands with ``\.{withcolor

-(r,g,b)}'' specifiers while a color is defined.

-

-@ A constant bounding the size of the named-color array.

-

-@d max_named_colors 100 /* maximum number of distinct named colors */

-

-@ Then we declare a record for color types.

-

-@<Types...@>=

-typedef struct named_color_record {

-  const char *name; /* color name */

-  const char *value; /* text to pass to MetaPost */

-} named_color_record;

-

-@ Declare the named-color array itself.

-

-@<Globals@>=

-named_color_record named_colors[(max_named_colors+1)];

-  /* stores information about named colors, in sorted order by name */

-web_integer num_named_colors; /* number of elements of |named_colors| that are valid */

-

-@ This function, used only during initialization, defines a named color.

-

-@c

-static void mpx_def_named_color (MPX mpx, const char *n, const char *v) {

-  mpx->num_named_colors++;

-  assert(mpx->num_named_colors<max_named_colors);

-  mpx->named_colors[mpx->num_named_colors].name = n;

-  mpx->named_colors[mpx->num_named_colors].value = v;

-}

-

-@ @<Declarations@>=

-static void mpx_def_named_color (MPX mpx, const char *n, const char *v);

-

-@ During the initialization phase, we define values for all the named

-colors defined in \.{colordvi.tex}. CMYK-to-RGB conversion by GhostScript.

-

-This list has to be sorted alphabetically!

-

-@<Set initial values@>=

-mpx->num_named_colors = 0;

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Apricot", "(1.0, 0.680006, 0.480006)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Aquamarine", "(0.180006, 1.0, 0.7)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Bittersweet", "(0.760012, 0.0100122, 0.0)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Black", "(0.0, 0.0, 0.0)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Blue", "(0.0, 0.0, 1.0)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "BlueGreen", "(0.15, 1.0, 0.669994)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "BlueViolet", "(0.1, 0.05, 0.960012)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "BrickRed", "(0.719994, 0.0, 0.0)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Brown", "(0.4, 0.0, 0.0)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "BurntOrange", "(1.0, 0.489988, 0.0)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "CadetBlue", "(0.380006, 0.430006, 0.769994)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "CarnationPink", "(1.0, 0.369994, 1.0)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Cerulean", "(0.0600122, 0.889988, 1.0)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "CornflowerBlue", "(0.35, 0.869994, 1.0)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Cyan", "(0.0, 1.0, 1.0)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Dandelion", "(1.0, 0.710012, 0.160012)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "DarkOrchid", "(0.6, 0.2, 0.8)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Emerald", "(0.0, 1.0, 0.5)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "ForestGreen", "(0.0, 0.880006, 0.0)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Fuchsia", "(0.45, 0.00998169, 0.919994)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Goldenrod", "(1.0, 0.9, 0.160012)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Gray", "(0.5, 0.5, 0.5)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Green", "(0.0, 1.0, 0.0)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "GreenYellow", "(0.85, 1.0, 0.310012)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "JungleGreen", "(0.0100122, 1.0, 0.480006)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Lavender", "(1.0, 0.519994, 1.0)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "LimeGreen", "(0.5, 1.0, 0.0)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Magenta", "(1.0, 0.0, 1.0)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Mahogany", "(0.65, 0.0, 0.0)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Maroon", "(0.680006, 0.0, 0.0)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Melon", "(1.0, 0.539988, 0.5)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "MidnightBlue", "(0.0, 0.439988, 0.569994)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Mulberry", "(0.640018, 0.0800061, 0.980006)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "NavyBlue", "(0.0600122, 0.460012, 1.0)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "OliveGreen", "(0.0, 0.6, 0.0)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Orange", "(1.0, 0.389988, 0.130006)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "OrangeRed", "(1.0, 0.0, 0.5)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Orchid", "(0.680006, 0.360012, 1.0)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Peach", "(1.0, 0.5, 0.3)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Periwinkle", "(0.430006, 0.45, 1.0)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "PineGreen", "(0.0, 0.75, 0.160012)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Plum", "(0.5, 0.0, 1.0)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "ProcessBlue", "(0.0399878, 1.0, 1.0)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Purple", "(0.55, 0.139988, 1.0)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "RawSienna", "(0.55, 0.0, 0.0)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Red", "(1.0, 0.0, 0.0)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "RedOrange", "(1.0, 0.230006, 0.130006)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "RedViolet", "(0.590018, 0.0, 0.660012)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Rhodamine", "(1.0, 0.180006, 1.0)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "RoyalBlue", "(0.0, 0.5, 1.0)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "RoyalPurple", "(0.25, 0.1, 1.0)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "RubineRed", "(1.0, 0.0, 0.869994)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Salmon", "(1.0, 0.469994, 0.619994)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "SeaGreen", "(0.310012, 1.0, 0.5)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Sepia", "(0.3, 0.0, 0.0)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "SkyBlue", "(0.380006, 1.0, 0.880006)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "SpringGreen", "(0.739988, 1.0, 0.239988)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Tan", "(0.860012, 0.580006, 0.439988)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "TealBlue", "(0.119994, 0.980006, 0.640018)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Thistle", "(0.880006, 0.410012, 1.0)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Turquoise", "(0.15, 1.0, 0.8)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Violet", "(0.210012, 0.119994, 1.0)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "VioletRed", "(1.0, 0.189988, 1.0)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "White", "(1.0, 1.0, 1.0)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "WildStrawberry", "(1.0, 0.0399878, 0.610012)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Yellow", "(1.0, 1.0, 0.0)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "YellowGreen", "(0.560012, 1.0, 0.260012)");

-mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "YellowOrange", "(1.0, 0.580006, 0.0)");

-

-@ Color commands get a separate warning procedure. |warn| sets |history :=

-mpx_warning_given|, which causes a nonzero exit status; but color errors are

-trivial and should leave the exit status zero.

-

-@d color_warn(A) mpx_warn(mpx,A)

-@d color_warn_two(A,B) mpx_warn(mpx,"%s%s",A,B)

-

-@ The |do_xxx| procedure handles DVI specials (defined with the |xxx1...xxx4| commands).

-

-@d XXX_BUF 256

-

-@<Declare procedures to handle color commands@>=

-static void mpx_do_xxx (MPX mpx, web_integer p)

-{

-  unsigned char buf[(XXX_BUF+1)]; /* FIXME: Fixed size buffer. */

-  web_integer l, r, m, k, len;

-  boolean  found;

-  int bufsiz = XXX_BUF;

-  len = 0;

-  while ( ( p > 0) && (len < bufsiz) ) {

-    buf[len] = (unsigned char)mpx_get_byte(mpx);

-    decr(p); incr(len);

-  }

-  @<Check whether |buf| contains a color command; if not, |goto XXXX|@>

-  if ( p > 0 ) {

-     color_warn("long \"color\" special ignored"); 

-     goto XXXX; 

-  }

-  if ( @<|buf| contains a color pop command@> ) {

-     @<Handle a color pop command@>

-  } else if ( @<|buf| contains a color push command@> ) {

-     @<Handle a color push command@>

-  } else {

-     color_warn("unknown \"color\" special ignored"); 

-     goto XXXX; 

-  }

-XXXX: 

-  for (k = 1;k<=p;k++) (void)mpx_get_byte(mpx);

-}

-

-@

-

-@<Check whether |buf| contains a color command; if not, |goto XXXX|@>=

-if ( (len <= 5)

-   || (buf[0] != 'c')

-   || (buf[1] != 'o')

-   || (buf[2] != 'l')

-   || (buf[3] != 'o')

-   || (buf[4] != 'r')

-   || (buf[5] != ' ')

-  ) goto XXXX;

-

-@ @<|buf| contains a color push command@>=

-(len >= 11) && 

- (buf[6] == 'p') && 

- (buf[7] == 'u') && 

- (buf[8] == 's') && 

- (buf[9] == 'h') && 

- (buf[10] == ' ')

-

-@ @<|buf| contains a color pop command@>=

-(len == 9) && 

-(buf[6] == 'p') && 

-(buf[7] == 'o') && 

-(buf[8] == 'p')

-

-@ The \.{color push} and \.{pop} commands imply a color stack, so we need a

-global variable to hold that stack.

-

-@d max_color_stack_depth 10 /* maximum depth of saved color stack */

-

-@ Here's the actual stack variables.

-

-@<Globals@>=

-web_integer color_stack_depth; /* current depth of saved color stack */

-char *color_stack[(max_color_stack_depth+1)]; /* saved color stack */

-

-@ Initialize the stack to empty.

-

-@<Set initial values@>=

-mpx->color_stack_depth = 0;

-

-@ \.{color pop} just pops the stack.

-

-@<Handle a color pop command@>=

-mpx_finish_last_char(mpx);

-if (mpx->color_stack_depth > 0 ) {

-  free(mpx->color_stack[mpx->color_stack_depth]);

-  decr(mpx->color_stack_depth);

-} else {

-  color_warn("color stack underflow");

-}

-

-@ \.{color push} pushes a color onto the stack.

-

-@<Handle a color push command@>=

-mpx_finish_last_char(mpx);

-if ( mpx->color_stack_depth >= max_color_stack_depth )

-  mpx_abort(mpx,"color stack overflow");

-incr(mpx->color_stack_depth);

-/*  I don't know how to do string operations in Pascal.  */

-/*  Skip over extra spaces after 'color push'.  */

-l = 11;

-while ( (l < len - 1) && (buf[l] == ' ') ) incr(l);

-if ( @<|buf[l]| contains an rgb command@> ) {

-  @<Handle a color push rgb command@>

-} else if ( @<|buf[l]| contains a cmyk command@> ) {

-  @<Handle a color push cmyk command@>

-} else if ( @<|buf[l]| contains a gray command@> ) {

-  @<Handle a color push gray command@>

-} else {

-  @<Handle a named color push command@>

-}

-

-@ @<|buf[l]| contains an rgb command@>=

-(l + 4 < len)

-&& (buf[l]   == 'r')

-&& (buf[l+1] == 'g')

-&& (buf[l+2] == 'b')

-&& (buf[l+3] == ' ')

-

-@ @<Handle a color push rgb command@>=

-l = l + 4;

-while ( (l < len) && (buf[l] == ' ') ) incr(l); /*  Remove spaces at end of buf  */

-while ( (len > l) && (buf[len - 1] == ' ') ) decr(len);

-mpx->color_stack[mpx->color_stack_depth]=xmalloc((size_t)(len-l+3),1);

-k = 0;

-@<Copy |buf[l]| to |color_stack[color_stack_depth][k]| in tuple form@>

-

-@ @<|buf[l]| contains a gray command@>=

-(l + 5 < len)

-&& (buf[l]   == 'g')

-&& (buf[l+1] == 'r')

-&& (buf[l+2] == 'a')

-&& (buf[l+3] == 'y')

-&& (buf[l+4] == ' ')

-

-@ @<Handle a color push gray command@>=

-l = l + 5;

-while ( (l < len) && (buf[l] == ' ') ) incr(l); /*  Remove spaces at end of buf  */

-while ( (len > l) && (buf[len - 1] == ' ') ) decr(len);

-mpx->color_stack[mpx->color_stack_depth]=xmalloc((size_t)(len-l+9),1);

-strcpy(mpx->color_stack[mpx->color_stack_depth],"white*");

-k = 6;

-@<Copy |buf[l]| to |color_stack[color_stack_depth][k]| in tuple form@>

-

-@ @<|buf[l]| contains a cmyk command@>=

-(l + 5 < len)

-&& (buf[l]   == 'c')

-&& (buf[l+1] == 'm')

-&& (buf[l+2] == 'y')

-&& (buf[l+3] == 'k')

-&& (buf[l+4] == ' ')

-

-@ @<Handle a color push cmyk command@>=

-l = l + 5;

-while ( (l < len) && (buf[l] == ' ') ) incr(l);

-/*  Remove spaces at end of buf  */

-while ( (len > l) && (buf[len - 1] == ' ') ) decr(len);

-mpx->color_stack[mpx->color_stack_depth]=xmalloc((size_t)(len-l+7),1);

-strcpy(mpx->color_stack[mpx->color_stack_depth],"cmyk");

-k = 4;

-@<Copy |buf[l]| to |color_stack[color_stack_depth][k]| in tuple form@>

-

-@ @<Copy |buf[l]| to |color_stack[color_stack_depth][k]| in tuple form@>=

-mpx->color_stack[mpx->color_stack_depth][k] = '(';

-incr(k);

-while ( l < len ) {

-  if ( buf[l] == ' ' ) {

-    mpx->color_stack[mpx->color_stack_depth][k] = ',';

-    while ( (l < len) && (buf[l] == ' ') ) incr(l);

-    incr(k);

-  } else {

-    mpx->color_stack[mpx->color_stack_depth][k] = (char)buf[l];

-    incr(l);

-    incr(k);

-  }

-}

-mpx->color_stack[mpx->color_stack_depth][k] = ')';

-mpx->color_stack[mpx->color_stack_depth][k+1] = 0;

-

-@ Binary-search the |named_colors| array, then push the found color onto

-the stack.

-

-@<Handle a named color push command@>=

-for (k = l;k<=len - 1;k++) {

-  buf[k - l] = xchr(buf[k]);

-}

-buf[len - l] = 0;

-len = len - l;

-l = 1; r = mpx->num_named_colors;

-found = false;

-while ( (l <= r) && ! found ) {

-  m = (l + r) / 2; k = strcmp((char *)(buf), mpx->named_colors[m].name);

-  if ( k == 0 ) {

-    mpx->color_stack[mpx->color_stack_depth]=xstrdup(mpx->named_colors[m].value);

-    found = true;

-  } else if ( k < 0 ) {

-    r = m - 1;

-  } else {

-    l = m + 1;

-  }

-}

-if (! found ) {

-   color_warn_two("non-hardcoded color \"%s\" in \"color push\" command", buf);

-   mpx->color_stack[mpx->color_stack_depth]=xstrdup((char *)(buf));

-}

-

-@ Last but not least, this code snippet prints a \.{withcolor} specifier

-for the top of the color stack, if the stack is nonempty.

-

-@<Print a \.{withcolor} specifier if appropriate@>=

-if ( mpx->color_stack_depth > 0 ) {

-  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile," withcolor %s\n",mpx->color_stack[mpx->color_stack_depth]);

-}

-

-

-@* \[4] Dmp.

-

-This program reads device-independent troff output files,

-and converts them into a symbolic form understood by MetaPost.  Some

-of the code was borrowed from DVItoMP.  It understands all the D? graphics

-functions that dpost does but it ignores `x X' device control functions

-such as `x X SetColor:...', `x X BeginPath:', and `x X DrawPath:...'.

-

-The output file is a sequence of MetaPost picture expressions, one for every

-page in the input file.  It makes no difference where the input file comes

-from, but it is intended to process the result of running eqn and troff on

-the output of MPtoTR.  Such a file contains one page for every btex...etex

-block in the original input.  This program then creates a corresponding

-sequence of MetaPost picture expressions for use as an auxiliary input file.

-Since MetaPost expects such files to have the extension .mpx, the output

-is sometimes called an `mpx' file.

-

-@d SHIFTS	100		/* maximum number of characters with special shifts */

-@d MAXCHARS 256		/* character codes fall in the range 0..MAXCHARS-1 */

-

-@d is_specchar(c)	(!mpx->gflag && (c)<=2)	/* does charcode c identify a special char? */

-@d LWscale	0.03		/* line width for graphics as a fraction of pointsize */

-@d YCORR 12.0		/* V coordinate of reference point in (big) points */

-

-@<Globals@>=

-int next_specfnt[(max_fnums+1)];	/* used to link special fonts together */

-int shiftchar[SHIFTS];		/* charcode of character to shift, else -1 */

-float shifth[SHIFTS];

-float shiftv[SHIFTS];	/* shift vals/fontsize (y is upward) */

-int shiftptr;		/* number of entries in shift tables */

-int shiftbase[(max_fnums+1)];		/* initial index into shifth,shiftv,shiftchar */

-int specfnt;		/* int. num. of first special font (or FCOUNT) */

-int *specf_tail ;	/* tail of specfnt list |(*specf_tail==FCOUNT)| */

-float cursize;			/* current type size in (big) points */

-unsigned int curfont;			/* internal number for current font */

-float Xslant;			/* degrees additional slant for all fonts */

-float Xheight;			/* yscale fonts to this height if nonzero */

-float sizescale;		/* groff font size scaling factor */

-int gflag;			/* non-zero if using groff fonts */

-float unit;		/* (big) points per troff unit (0 when unset) */

-

-@ @<Set initial...@>=

-mpx->shiftptr = 0;

-mpx->specfnt = (max_fnums+1);

-mpx->specf_tail = &(mpx->specfnt);

-mpx->unit = 0.0;

-mpx->lnno = 0; /* this is a reset */

-mpx->gflag = 0;

-mpx->h = 0; mpx->v = 0; 

-

-@ @(mpxout.h@>=

-typedef char *(*mpx_file_finder)(MPX, const char *, const char *, int);

-enum mpx_filetype {

-  mpx_tfm_format,           /* |kpse_tfm_format| */

-  mpx_vf_format,            /* |kpse_vf_format| */

-  mpx_trfontmap_format,     /* |kpse_mpsupport_format| */

-  mpx_trcharadj_format,     /* |kpse_mpsupport_format| */

-  mpx_desc_format,          /* |kpse_troff_font_format| */

-  mpx_fontdesc_format,      /* |kpse_troff_font_format| */

-  mpx_specchar_format       /* |kpse_mpsupport_format| */

-};

-

-@ @<Globals@>=

-mpx_file_finder find_file;

-

-@ @<Declarations@>=

-static char *mpx_find_file (MPX mpx, const char *nam, const char *mode, int ftype);

-

-@ @c

-static char *mpx_find_file (MPX mpx, const char *nam, const char *mode, int ftype) {

-  (void) mpx;

-  if (mode[0] != 'r' || (! access (nam,R_OK)) || ftype) {  

-     return strdup(nam);

-  }

-  return NULL;

-}

-

-@ @<Set initial...@>=

-mpx->find_file = mpx_find_file;

-

-@ @<Declarations@>=

-static FILE *mpx_fsearch(MPX mpx, const char *nam, int format);

-

-@ @c

-static FILE *mpx_fsearch(MPX mpx, const char *nam, int format) {

-	FILE *f = NULL;

-	char *fname = (mpx->find_file)(mpx, nam, "r", format);

-	if (fname) {

-	  f = fopen(fname, "rb");

-      mpx_report(mpx,"%p = fopen(%s,\"rb\")",f, fname);

-	}

-	return f;

-}

-

-@ Hash tables (or rather: AVL lists)

-

-@ @<Types...@>=

-typedef struct {

-    char *name;

-    int num;

-} avl_entry;

-

-@ @c

-static int mpx_comp_name (void *p, const void *pa, const void *pb) {

-    (void)p;

-    return strcmp  (((const avl_entry *) pa)->name,

-                   ((const avl_entry *) pb)->name);

-}

-static void *destroy_avl_entry (void *pa) {

-    avl_entry *p;

-    p = (avl_entry *) pa;

-    free (p->name);

-    free (p);

-    return NULL;

-}

-static void *copy_avl_entry (const void *pa) { /* never used */

-    avl_entry *p, *q;

-    p = (avl_entry *) pa;

-    q = malloc(sizeof(avl_entry));

-    if (q!=NULL) {

-      q->name = strdup(p->name);

-      q->num = p->num;

-    }

-    return (void *)q;

-}

-

-

-@ @c

-static avl_tree mpx_avl_create (MPX mpx) {

-   avl_tree t;

-   t = avl_create(mpx_comp_name, 

-                  copy_avl_entry,

-                  destroy_avl_entry,

-                  malloc, free, NULL);

-   if (t==NULL) 

-     mpx_abort(mpx, "Memory allocation failure");

-   return t;

-}

-

-@ The only two operations on AVL lists are finding already existing

-items, or interning new items. Finding is handled by explicit |avl_find| 

-calls where needed, but it is wise to have a wrapper around |avl_probe|

-to check for memory errors.

-

-@c

-static void mpx_avl_probe(MPX mpx, avl_tree tab, avl_entry *p) {

-    avl_entry *r  = (avl_entry *)avl_find(p, tab);

-    if (r==NULL) {

-      if (avl_ins (p, tab, avl_false)<0)

-        mpx_abort(mpx,"Memory allocation failure");

-    }

-}

-

-

-@ Scanning Numbers

-

-The standard functions atoi(), atof(), and sscanf() provide ways of reading

-numbers from strings but they give no indication of how much of the string

-is consumed.  These homemade versions don't parse scientific notation.

-

-@<Globals@>=

-char *arg_tail;			/* char after the number just gotten; NULL on failure */

-

-@ @c 

-static int mpx_get_int(MPX mpx, char *s) {

-    register int i, d, neg;

-    if (s == NULL)

-	  goto BAD;

-    for (neg = 0;; s++) {

-	  if (*s == '-')

-	    neg = !neg;

-	  else if (*s != ' ' && *s != '\t')

-	    break;

-    }

-    if (i = *s - '0', 0 > i || i > 9)

-	  goto BAD;

-    while (d = *++s - '0', 0 <= d && d <= 9)

-	i = 10 * i + d;

-    mpx->arg_tail = s;

-    return neg ? -i : i;

-  BAD:

-    mpx->arg_tail = NULL;

-    return 0;

-}

-

-@ GROFF font description files use octal character codes

-|groff_font(5)|: The code can be any web_integer.  If it starts with

-a 0 it will be interpreted as octal; if it starts with  0x

-or 0X it will be intepreted as hexadecimal.

-

-@c 

-static int mpx_get_int_map(MPX mpx, char *s) {

-  register int i;

-  if (s == NULL)

-	goto BAD;

-  i = strtol(s, &(mpx->arg_tail), 0);

-  if (s == mpx->arg_tail)

-	goto BAD;

-  return i;

-BAD:

-  mpx->arg_tail = NULL;

-  return 0;

-}

-

-@ Troff output files contain few if any non-web_integers, but this program is

-prepared to read floats whenever they seem reasonable; i.e., when the

-number is not being used for character positioning.  (For non-PostScript

-applications h and v are usually in pixels and should be web_integers.)

-

-@c 

-static float mpx_get_float(MPX mpx, char *s) {

-  register int d, neg, digits;

-  register float x, y;

-  digits = 0;

-  neg = 0; x=0.0; 

-  if (s != NULL) {

-	for (neg = 0;; s++) {

-      if (*s == '-')

-		neg = !neg;

-	  else if (*s != ' ' && *s != '\t')

-		break;

-    }

-	x = 0.0;

-	while (d = *s - '0', 0 <= d && d <= 9) {

-      x = 10.0 * x + d;

-	  digits++;

-	  s++;

-	}

-	if (*s == '.') {

-	  y = 1.0;

-	  while (d = *++s - '0', 0 <= d && d <= 9) {

-	    y /= 10.0;

-		x += y * d;

-		digits++;

-	  }

-	}

-  }

-  if (digits == 0) {

-	mpx->arg_tail = NULL;

-	return 0.0;

-  }

-  mpx->arg_tail = s;

-  return neg ? -x : x;

-}

-

-@ GROFF font description files have metrics field

-of comma-separated web_integers. Traditional troff

-have a float in this position. The value is not

-used anyway - thus just skip the value,

- eat all non-space chars.

-

-@c 

-static float mpx_get_float_map(MPX mpx, char *s) {

-    if (s != NULL) {

-	while (isspace(*s))

-	    s++;

-	while (!isspace(*s) && *s)

-	    s++;

-    }

-    mpx->arg_tail = s;

-    return 0;

-}

-

-

-@ Reading Initialization Files

-

-Read the database file, reserve internal font numbers and set

-the |font_name| entries.  Each line in the database file contains

-|<troff-name>\t,PostScript-name>\t<TeX-name>|

-or just 

-|<troff-name>\t,PostScript-name>| 

-if the \TeX\ name matches the PostScript name. (|\t| means one or more tabs.)

-

-@<Globals@>=

-avl_tree trfonts;

-

-@ @c

-static void mpx_read_fmap(MPX mpx, const char *dbase) {

-    FILE *fin;

-    avl_entry *tmp;

-    char *nam;			/* a font name being read */

-    char *buf;

-    mpx->nfonts = 0;

-    fin = mpx_fsearch(mpx,dbase, mpx_trfontmap_format);

-    if (fin==NULL)

-	  mpx_abort(mpx,"Cannot find %s", dbase);

-

-    mpx->trfonts = mpx_avl_create (mpx);

-    while ((buf = mpx_getline(mpx,fin)) != NULL) {

-	  if (mpx->nfonts == (max_fnums+1))

-	    mpx_abort(mpx,"Need to increase max_fnums");

-      nam = buf;    

-      while (*buf && *buf != '\t')

-        buf++;

-      if (nam==buf)

-        continue;

-      tmp = xmalloc(sizeof(avl_entry),1);

-      tmp->name = xmalloc (1,(buf-nam)+1);

-      strncpy(tmp->name,nam,(buf-nam));

-      tmp->name[(buf-nam)] = '\0';

-      tmp->num = (int)mpx->nfonts++;

-      assert(avl_ins (tmp, mpx->trfonts, avl_false) > 0);

-      if (*buf) {

-        buf++;

-	    while (*buf == '\t') buf++;

-        while (*buf && *buf != '\t') buf++; /* skip over psname */

-        while (*buf == '\t') buf++;

-        if (*buf)

-          nam = buf;

-        while (*buf) buf++; 

-      }

-      mpx->font_name[tmp->num] = xstrdup(nam);

-	  mpx->font_num[tmp->num] = -1;	/* indicate font is not mounted */

-    }

-    mpx_fclose(mpx,fin);

-}

-

-

-@ Some characters need their coordinates shifted in order to agree with

-troff's view of the world.  Logically, this information belongs in the

-font description files but it actually resides in a PostScript prolog

-that the troff output processor dpost reads.  Since that file is in

-PostScript and subject to change, we read the same information from

-a small auxiliary file that gives shift amounts relative to the font

-size with y upward.

-

-GROFF NOTE:

-The PostScript prologue in GNU groff's font directory does not

-contain any character shift information, so the following function

-becomes redundant.  Simply keeping an empty "trchars.adj" file

-around will do fine without requiring any changes to this program.

-

-@c 

-static void mpx_read_char_adj(MPX mpx, const char *adjfile) {

-    FILE *fin;

-    char buf[200];

-    avl_entry tmp, *p;

-    unsigned int i;

-

-    fin = mpx_fsearch(mpx,adjfile, mpx_trcharadj_format);

-    if (fin==NULL)

-	  mpx_abort(mpx,"Cannot find %s", adjfile);

-

-    for (i = 0; i < mpx->nfonts; i++)

-	mpx->shiftbase[i] = 0;

-    while (fgets(buf, 200, fin) != NULL) {

-	if (mpx->shiftptr == SHIFTS - 1)

-	    mpx_abort(mpx,"Need to increase SHIFTS");

-	if (buf[0] != ' ' && buf[0] != '\t') {

-	    for (i = 0; buf[i] != '\0'; i++)

-		  if (buf[i] == '\n')

-		    buf[i] = '\0';

-	    mpx->shiftchar[mpx->shiftptr++] = -1;

-        tmp.name = buf;

-        p = (avl_entry *)avl_find (&tmp, mpx->trfonts);

-	    if (p==NULL)

-		  mpx_abort(mpx,"%s refers to unknown font %s", adjfile, buf);

-	    mpx->shiftbase[p->num] = mpx->shiftptr;

-        

-	} else {

-	    mpx->shiftchar[mpx->shiftptr] = mpx_get_int(mpx,buf);

-	    mpx->shifth[mpx->shiftptr] = mpx_get_float(mpx,mpx->arg_tail);

-	    mpx->shiftv[mpx->shiftptr] = -mpx_get_float(mpx,mpx->arg_tail);

-	    if (mpx->arg_tail == NULL)

-		mpx_abort(mpx,"Bad shift entry : \"%s\"", buf);

-	    mpx->shiftptr++;

-	}

-    }

-    mpx->shiftchar[mpx->shiftptr++] = -1;

-    mpx_fclose(mpx,fin);

-}

-

-@ Read the DESC file of the troff device to gather information

-   about sizescale and whether running under groff.

-

-Ignore all commands not specially handled. This relieves

-of collecting commands without arguments here and also

-makes the program more robust in case of future DESC

-extensions.

-

-@c 

-static void mpx_read_desc(MPX mpx) {

-    const char *const k1[] = {

-	"res", "hor", "vert", "unitwidth", "paperwidth",

-	"paperlength", "biggestfont", "spare2", "encoding",

-	NULL

-    };

-    const char *const g1[] = {

-	"family", "paperheight", "postpro", "prepro",

-	"print", "image_generator", "broken",

-	NULL

-    };

-    char cmd[200];

-    FILE *fp;

-    int i, n;

-

-    fp = mpx_fsearch(mpx,"DESC", mpx_desc_format);

-    if (fp==NULL)

-	  mpx_abort(mpx,"Cannot find DESC");

-    while (fscanf(fp, "%199s", cmd) != EOF) {

-	if (*cmd == '#') {

-	    while ((i = getc(fp)) != EOF && i != '\n');

-	    continue;

-	}

-	if (strcmp(cmd, "fonts") == 0) {

-	    if (fscanf(fp, "%d", &n) != 1)

-		return;

-	    for (i = 0; i < n; i++)

-		if (fscanf(fp, "%*s") == EOF)

-		    return;

-	} else if (strcmp(cmd, "sizes") == 0) {

-	    while (fscanf(fp, "%d", &n) == 1 && n != 0);

-	} else if (strcmp(cmd, "styles") == 0 ||

-		   strcmp(cmd, "papersize") == 0) {

-	    mpx->gflag++;

-	    while ((i = getc(fp)) != EOF && i != '\n');

-	} else if (strcmp(cmd, "sizescale") == 0) {

-	    if (fscanf(fp, "%d", &n) == 1)

-		mpx->sizescale = (float)n;

-	    mpx->gflag++;

-	} else if (strcmp(cmd, "charset") == 0) {

-	    return;

-	} else {

-	    for (i = 0; k1[i]; i++)

-		if (strcmp(cmd, k1[i]) == 0) {

-		    if (fscanf(fp, "%*s") == EOF)

-			return;

-		    break;

-		}

-	    if (k1[i] == 0)

-		for (i = 0; g1[i]; i++)

-		    if (strcmp(cmd, g1[i]) == 0) {

-			if (fscanf(fp, "%*s") == EOF)

-			    return;

-			mpx->gflag = 1;

-			break;

-		    }

-	}

-    }

-}

-

-

-@ Given one line from the character description file for the font with

-internal number f, save the appropriate data in the charcodes[f] table.

-A return value of zero indicates a syntax error.

-

-GROFF:

-GNU groff uses an extended font description file format documented

-in |groff_font(5)|.  In order to allow parsing of groff's font files,

-this function needs to be rewritten as follows:

-

-\item{1.}The `metrics' field parsed by |mpx_get_float(lin);| may include

-   a comma-separated list of up to six decimal web_integers rather

-   than just a single floating-point number.

-

-\item{2.}The `charcode' field parsed by |lastcode = mpx_get_int(arg_tail);|

-   may be given either in decimal, octal, or hexadecimal format.

-

-@ @<Globals@>=

-avl_tree charcodes[(max_fnums+1)];	/* hash tables for translating char names */

-

-@ @c

-static int mpx_scan_desc_line(MPX mpx, int f, char *lin) {

-    static int lastcode;

-    avl_entry *tmp;

-    char *s, *t;

-    t = lin;

-    while (*lin != ' ' && *lin != '\t' && *lin != '\0')

-	  lin++;

-    if (lin==t)

-      return 1;

-    s = xmalloc((size_t)(lin-t+1),1);

-    strncpy(s,t,(size_t)(lin-t));

-    *(s+(lin-t)) = '\0';

-    while (*lin == ' ' || *lin == '\t')

-	  lin++;

-    if (*lin == '"') {

-	  if (lastcode < MAXCHARS) {

-        tmp = xmalloc(sizeof(avl_entry),1);

-        tmp->name = s ;

-        tmp->num = lastcode;

-        mpx_avl_probe (mpx, mpx->charcodes[f],tmp);

-      }

-    } else {

-	  (void) mpx_get_float_map(mpx,lin);

-	  (void) mpx_get_int(mpx,mpx->arg_tail);

-	  lastcode = mpx_get_int_map(mpx,mpx->arg_tail);

-	  if (mpx->arg_tail == NULL)

-	    return 0;

-	  if (lastcode < MAXCHARS) {

-        tmp = xmalloc(sizeof(avl_entry),1);

-        tmp->name = s ;

-        tmp->num = lastcode;

-        mpx_avl_probe (mpx, mpx->charcodes[f],tmp);

-      }

-    }

-    return 1;

-}

-

-@ Read the font description file for the font with the given troff name

-and update the data structures.  The result is the internal font number.

-

-@c 

-static int mpx_read_fontdesc(MPX mpx, char *nam) {	/* troff name */

-    char buf[200];

-    avl_entry tmp, *p;

-    FILE *fin;			/* input file */

-    int f;			/* internal font number */

-

-    if (mpx->unit == 0.0)

-	mpx_abort(mpx, "Resolution is not set soon enough");

-    tmp.name = nam;

-    p = (avl_entry *)avl_find (&tmp,mpx->trfonts);

-    if (p == NULL)

-	  mpx_abort(mpx, "Font was not in map file");

-    f = p->num;

-    fin = mpx_fsearch(mpx, nam, mpx_fontdesc_format);

-    if (fin==NULL)

-	  mpx_abort(mpx,"Cannot find %s", nam);

-    for (;;) {

-	  if (fgets(buf, 200, fin) == NULL)

-	    mpx_abort(mpx, "Description file for %s ends unexpectedly", nam);

-	  if (strncmp(buf, "special", 7) == 0) {

-	    *(mpx->specf_tail) = f;

-	    mpx->next_specfnt[f] = (max_fnums+1);

-	    mpx->specf_tail = &(mpx->next_specfnt[f]);

-	  } else if (strncmp(buf, "charset", 7) == 0)

-	    break;

-    }

-    mpx->charcodes[f] = mpx_avl_create (mpx);

-    while (fgets(buf, 200, fin) != NULL)

-	  if (mpx_scan_desc_line(mpx, f, buf) == 0)

-	    mpx_abort(mpx, "%s has a bad line in its description file: %s", nam, buf);

-    mpx_fclose(mpx,fin);

-    return f;

-}

-

-@		Page and Character Output

-

-@<Globals@>=

-boolean graphics_used;		/* nonzero if any graphics seen on this page */

-float dmp_str_h1;

-float dmp_str_v;		/* corrected start pos for current out string */

-float dmp_str_h2;			/* where the current output string ends */

-float str_size;			/* point size for this text string */

-

-

-@ Print any transformations required by the current Xslant and Xheight settings.

-

-@<Declarations@>=

-static void mpx_slant_and_ht(MPX mpx);

-

-@ @c

-static void mpx_slant_and_ht(MPX mpx) {

- int i = 0;

-  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, "(");

- if (mpx->Xslant != 0.0) {

-	fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, " slanted%.5f", mpx->Xslant);

-	i++;

-  }

-  if (mpx->Xheight != mpx->cursize && mpx->Xheight != 0.0 && mpx->cursize != 0.0) {

-	fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, " yscaled%.4f", mpx->Xheight / mpx->cursize);

-	i++;

-  }

-  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, ")");

-}

-

-

-@ Output character number c in the font with internal number f.

-

-@c 

-static void mpx_set_num_char(MPX mpx, int f, int c) {

-    float hh, vv;		/* corrected versions of h, v */

-    int i;

-

-    hh = (float)mpx->h;

-    vv = (float)mpx->v;

-    for (i = mpx->shiftbase[f]; mpx->shiftchar[i] >= 0 && i < SHIFTS; i++)

-	if (mpx->shiftchar[i] == c) {

-	    hh += (mpx->cursize / mpx->unit) * mpx->shifth[i];

-	    vv += (mpx->cursize / mpx->unit) * mpx->shiftv[i];

-	    break;

-	}

-    if (hh - mpx->dmp_str_h2 >= 1.0 || mpx->dmp_str_h2 - hh >= 1.0 || 

-        vv - mpx->dmp_str_v >= 1.0 || mpx->dmp_str_v - vv >= 1.0 || 

-        f != mpx->str_f || mpx->cursize != mpx->str_size) {

-	  if (mpx->str_f >= 0)

-	    mpx_finish_last_char(mpx);

-	  else if (!mpx->fonts_used)

-	    mpx_prepare_font_use(mpx);	/* first font usage on this page */

-	  if (!mpx->font_used[f])

-	    mpx_first_use(mpx,f);	/* first use of font f on this page */

-  	  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, "_s((");

-	  mpx->print_col = 3;

-	  mpx->str_f = f;

-	  mpx->dmp_str_v = vv;

-	  mpx->dmp_str_h1 = hh;

-	  mpx->str_size = mpx->cursize;

-    }

-    mpx_print_char(mpx, (unsigned char)c);

-    mpx->dmp_str_h2 = hh + char_width(f,c);

-}

-

-@ Output a string. 

-

-@c

-static void mpx_set_string(MPX mpx, char *cname) {

-    float hh;			/* corrected version of h, current horisontal position */

-

-    if (!*cname)

-	  return;

-    hh = (float)mpx->h;

-    mpx_set_num_char(mpx,(int)mpx->curfont, *cname);

-    hh +=  char_width(mpx->curfont,(int)*cname);

-    while (*++cname) {

-	  mpx_print_char(mpx,(unsigned char)*cname);

-	  hh += char_width(mpx->curfont,(int)*cname);

-    }

-    mpx->h = (web_integer)floor(hh+0.5);

-    mpx_finish_last_char(mpx);

-}

-

-@ Special Characters

-

-Given the troff name of a special character, this routine finds its

-definition and copies it to the MPX file.  It also finds the name of

-the vardef macro and returns that name. The name should be C.<something>.

-

-@ 

-TH: A bit of trickery is added here for case-insensitive 

-file systems. This aliasing allows the CHARLIB directory

-to exist on DVDs, for example.

-It is a hack, I know. I've stuck to  names on TeXLive.

-

-@d test_redo_search do {

-   if (deff==NULL)

-	 deff = mpx_fsearch(mpx, cname, mpx_specchar_format);

- } while (0)

-

-@c

-static char *mpx_copy_spec_char(MPX mpx, char *cname) {

-  FILE *deff;

-  int c;

-  char *s, *t;

-  char specintro[] = "vardef ";	/* MetaPost name follows this */

-  unsigned k = 0;			/* how much of specintro so far */

-  if (strcmp(cname, "ao") == 0) {

-	deff = mpx_fsearch(mpx, "ao.x", mpx_specchar_format);

-	test_redo_search;

-  } else if (strcmp(cname, "lh") == 0) {

-	deff = mpx_fsearch(mpx, "lh.x", mpx_specchar_format);

-	test_redo_search;

-  } else if (strcmp(cname, "~=") == 0) {

-	deff = mpx_fsearch(mpx, "twiddle", mpx_specchar_format);

-	test_redo_search;

-  } else {

-	deff = mpx_fsearch(mpx, cname, mpx_specchar_format);

-  }

-  if (deff==NULL)

-     mpx_abort(mpx, "No vardef in charlib/%s", cname);

-

-  while (k < (unsigned)strlen(specintro)) {

-	if ((c = getc(deff)) == EOF)

-	    mpx_abort(mpx, "No vardef in charlib/%s", cname);

-	putc(c, mpx->mpxfile);

-	if (c == specintro[k])

-	  k++;

-	else

-	  k = 0;

-  }

-  s = xmalloc(mpx->bufsize,1);

-  t = s ;

-  while ((c = getc(deff)) != '(') {

-	if (c == EOF)

-	  mpx_abort(mpx, "vardef in charlib/%s has no arguments", cname);

-	putc(c, mpx->mpxfile);

-	*t++ = c;

-  }

-  putc(c, mpx->mpxfile);

-  *t++ = '\0';

-  while ((c = getc(deff)) != EOF);

-    putc(c, mpx->mpxfile);

-  return s;

-}

-

-

-@ When given a character name instead of a number, we need to check if

-it is a special character and download the definition if necessary.

-If the character is not in the current font we have to search the special

-fonts.

-

-@<Globals@>=

-avl_tree spec_tab;

-

-@ The |spec_tab| avl table combines character names with macro names. 

-

-@<Types...@>=

-typedef struct {

-    char *name;

-    char *mac;

-} spec_entry;

-

-@ @c 

-static void mpx_set_char(MPX mpx, char *cname) {

-  int f, c;

-  avl_entry tmp, *p;

-  spec_entry *sp;

-

-  if (*cname == ' ' || *cname == '\t')

-	return;

-  f = (int)mpx->curfont;

-  tmp.name = cname;

-  p = avl_find(&tmp, mpx->charcodes[f]);

-  if (p==NULL) {

-	for (f = mpx->specfnt; f != (max_fnums+1); f = mpx->next_specfnt[f]) {

-        p = avl_find(&tmp, mpx->charcodes[f]);

-	    if (p!=NULL)

-		  goto OUT_LABEL;

-	}

-	mpx_abort(mpx, "There is no character %s", cname);

-  }

-OUT_LABEL:

-  c = p->num;

-  if (!is_specchar(c)) {

-	mpx_set_num_char(mpx, f, c);

-  } else {

-	if (mpx->str_f >= 0)

-	    mpx_finish_last_char(mpx);

-	if (!mpx->fonts_used)

-	    mpx_prepare_font_use(mpx);

-	if (!mpx->font_used[f])

-	    mpx_first_use(mpx, f);

-	if (mpx->spec_tab)

-       mpx->spec_tab = mpx_avl_create (mpx);

-    sp = xmalloc(sizeof(spec_entry),1);

-    sp->name = cname;

-    sp->mac = NULL;

-    {

-      spec_entry *r  = (spec_entry *)avl_find(sp, mpx->spec_tab);

-      if (r==NULL) {

-        if (avl_ins (sp, mpx->spec_tab, avl_false)<0)

-          mpx_abort(mpx,"Memory allocation failure");

-      }

-    }

-	if (sp->mac == NULL) {

-      sp->mac = mpx_copy_spec_char(mpx, cname);	/* this won't be NULL */

-    }

-	fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, "_s(%s(_n%d)", sp->mac,f);

-	fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, ",%.5f,%.4f,%.4f)",

-		(mpx->cursize/mpx->font_design_size[f])*1.00375, 

-         (double)((mpx->h*mpx->unit)/100.0), YCORR-mpx->v*mpx->unit);

-	mpx_slant_and_ht(mpx);

-	fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, ";\n");

-  }

-}

-

-@ Font Definitions

-

-Mount the font with troff name nam at external font number n and read any

-necessary font files.

-

-@c

-static void mpx_do_font_def(MPX mpx, int n, char *nam) {

-  int f;

-  unsigned k;

-  avl_entry tmp, *p;

-  tmp.name = nam;

-  p = (avl_entry *) avl_find (&tmp, mpx->trfonts);

-  if (p==NULL)

-    mpx_abort(mpx, "Font %s was not in map file", nam);

-  f = p->num;

-  if ( mpx->charcodes[f] == NULL) {

-    mpx_read_fontdesc(mpx, nam);

-    mpx->cur_name = xstrdup(mpx->font_name[f]);

-    if (! mpx_open_tfm_file(mpx) )

-      font_abort("No TFM file found for ",f);

-@.no TFM file found@>

-    mpx_in_TFM(mpx, f);

-  }

-  for (k = 0; k < mpx->nfonts; k++)

-	if (mpx->font_num[k] == n)

-	    mpx->font_num[k] = -1;

-  mpx->font_num[f] = n;

-  @<Do any other initialization required for the new font |f|@>;

-}

-

-

-

-@ Time on `makepath pencircle'

-

-Given the control points of a cubic Bernstein polynomial, evaluate it at t.

-

-@d Speed	((float) (PI/4.0))

-

-@c

-static float mpx_b_eval(const float *xx, float t) {

-    float zz[4];

-    register int i, j;

-    for (i = 0; i <= 3; i++)

-	zz[i] = xx[i];

-    for (i = 3; i > 0; i--)

-	for (j = 0; j < i; j++)

-	    zz[j] += t * (zz[j + 1] - zz[j]);

-    return zz[0];

-}

-

-

-@ Find the direction angle at time t on the path `makepath pencircle'.

-The tables below give the Bezier control points for MetaPost's cubic

-approximation to the first octant of a unit circle.

-

-@c

-static const float xx[] = { 1.0, 1.0, 0.8946431597,  0.7071067812 };

-static const float yy[] = { 0.0, 0.2652164899, 0.5195704026, 0.7071067812 };

-

-@ @c

-static float mpx_circangle(float t) {

-    float ti;

-    ti = floor(t);

-    t -= ti;

-    return (float) atan(mpx_b_eval(yy, t) / 

-                        mpx_b_eval(xx, t)) + ti * Speed;

-}

-

-

-@ Find the spline parameter where `makepath pencircle' comes closest to

-   (cos(a)/2,sin(a)/2).

-

-@c

-static float mpx_circtime(float a) {

-    int i;

-    float t;

-    t = a / Speed;

-    for (i = 2; --i >= 0;)

-	t += (a - mpx_circangle(t)) / Speed;

-    return t;

-}

-

-

-

-@ Troff Graphics

-

-@<Globals@>=

-float gx;

-float gy;			/* current point for graphics (init. (h,YCORR/mpx->unit-v) */

-

-@ @c 

-static void mpx_prepare_graphics(MPX mpx) {

-

-  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, "vardef _D(expr _d)expr _q =\n");

-  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,

-    " addto _p doublepath _q withpen pencircle scaled _d; enddef;\n");

-  mpx->graphics_used = true;

-}

-

-

-@ This function prints the current position (gx,gy).  Then if it can read dh dv

-from string s, it increments (gx,gy) and prints "--".  By returning the rest

-of the string s or NULL if nothing could be read from s, it provides the

-argument for the next iteration.

-

-@c 

-static char *mpx_do_line(MPX mpx, char *s) {

-  float dh, dv;

-

-  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, "(%.3f,%.3f)", mpx->gx * mpx->unit, mpx->gy * mpx->unit);

-  dh = mpx_get_float(mpx, s);

-  dv = mpx_get_float(mpx, mpx->arg_tail);

-  if (mpx->arg_tail == NULL)

-    return NULL;

-  mpx->gx += dh;

-  mpx->gy -= dv;

-  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, "--\n");

-  return mpx->arg_tail;

-}

-

-

-@ Function |spline_seg()| reads two pairs of (dh,dv) increments and prints the

-corresponding quadratic B-spline segment, leaving the ending point to be

-printed next time.  The return value is the string with the first (dh,dv)

-pair lopped off.  If only one pair of increments is found, we prepare to

-terminate the iteration by printing last time's ending point and returning

-NULL.

-

-@c 

-static char * mpx_spline_seg(MPX mpx, char *s) {

-  float dh1, dv1, dh2, dv2;

-

-  dh1 = mpx_get_float(mpx, s);

-  dv1 = mpx_get_float(mpx, mpx->arg_tail);

-  if (mpx->arg_tail == NULL)

-	mpx_abort(mpx, "Missing spline increments");

-  s = mpx->arg_tail;

-  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, "(%.3f,%.3f)", (mpx->gx + .5 * dh1) * mpx->unit,

-	    (mpx->gy - .5 * dv1) * mpx->unit);

-  mpx->gx += dh1;

-  mpx->gy -= dv1;

-  dh2 = mpx_get_float(mpx, s);

-  dv2 = mpx_get_float(mpx, mpx->arg_tail);

-  if (mpx->arg_tail == NULL)

-	return NULL;

-  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, "..\ncontrols (%.3f,%.3f) and (%.3f,%.3f)..\n",

-	    (mpx->gx - dh1 / 6.0) * mpx->unit, (mpx->gy + dv1 / 6.0) * mpx->unit,

-	    (mpx->gx + dh2 / 6.0) * mpx->unit, (mpx->gy - dv2 / 6.0) * mpx->unit);

-  return s;

-}

-

-

-@ Draw an ellipse with the given major and minor axes.

-

-@c 

-static void mpx_do_ellipse(MPX mpx, float a, float b) {

-

-  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, "makepath(pencircle xscaled %.3f\n yscaled %.3f",

-	    a * mpx->unit, b * mpx->unit);

-  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, " shifted (%.3f,%.3f));\n", (mpx->gx + .5 * a) * mpx->unit,

-	    mpx->gy * mpx->unit);

-  mpx->gx += a;

-}

-

-

-@ Draw a counter-clockwise arc centered at (cx,cy) with initial and final radii

-   (ax,ay) and (bx,by) respectively.

-

-@c 

-static 

-void mpx_do_arc(MPX mpx, float cx, float cy, float ax, float ay, float bx, float by) {

-  float t1, t2;

-

-  t1 = mpx_circtime(atan2(ay, ax));

-  t2 = mpx_circtime(atan2(by, bx));

-  if (t2 < t1)

-	t2 += 8.0;

-  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, "subpath (%.5f,%.5f) of\n", t1, t2);

-  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,

-	    " makepath(pencircle scaled %.3f shifted (%.3f,%.3f));\n",

-	    2.0 * sqrt(ax * ax + ay * ay) * mpx->unit, cx * mpx->unit, cy * mpx->unit);

-  mpx->gx = cx + bx;

-  mpx->gy = cy + by;

-}

-

-

-

-@ String s is everything following the initial `D' in a troff graphics command.

-

-@c 

-static void mpx_do_graphic(MPX mpx, char *s) {

-  float h1, v1, h2, v2;

-

-  mpx_finish_last_char(mpx);

-  /* GROFF uses Fd to set fill color for solid drawing objects to the

-     default, so just ignore that.

-   */

-  if (s[0] == 'F' && s[1] == 'd')

-	return;

-  mpx->gx = (float) mpx->h;

-  mpx->gy = YCORR / mpx->unit - ((float) mpx->v);

-  if (!mpx->graphics_used)

-	mpx_prepare_graphics(mpx);

-  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, "D(%.4f) ", LWscale * mpx->cursize);

-  switch (*s++) {

-  case 'c':

-	h1 = mpx_get_float(mpx,s);

-	if (mpx->arg_tail == NULL)

-	    mpx_abort(mpx,"Bad argument in %s", s-2);

-	mpx_do_ellipse(mpx,h1, h1);

-	break;

-  case 'e':

-	h1 = mpx_get_float(mpx,s);

-	v1 = mpx_get_float(mpx,mpx->arg_tail);

-	if (mpx->arg_tail == NULL)

-	    mpx_abort(mpx,"Bad argument in %s", s - 2);

-	mpx_do_ellipse(mpx,h1, v1);

-	break;

-  case 'A':

-	fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, "reverse ");

-	/* fall through */

-  case 'a':

-	h1 = mpx_get_float(mpx,s);

-	v1 = mpx_get_float(mpx,mpx->arg_tail);

-	h2 = mpx_get_float(mpx,mpx->arg_tail);

-	v2 = mpx_get_float(mpx,mpx->arg_tail);

-	if (mpx->arg_tail == NULL)

-	    mpx_abort(mpx,"Bad argument in %s", s - 2);

-	mpx_do_arc(mpx,mpx->gx + h1, mpx->gy - v1, -h1, v1, h2, -v2);

-	break;

-  case 'l':

-  case 'p':

-	while (s != NULL)

-	    s = mpx_do_line(mpx,s);

-	fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, ";\n");

-	break;

-  case 'q':

-	do

-      s = mpx_spline_seg(mpx,s);

-	while (s != NULL);

-	fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, ";\n");

-	break;

-  case '~':

-	fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, "(%.3f,%.3f)--", mpx->gx * mpx->unit, mpx->gy * mpx->unit);

-	do

-	    s = mpx_spline_seg(mpx,s);

-	while (s != NULL);

-	fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, "--(%.3f,%.3f);\n", mpx->gx * mpx->unit, mpx->gy * mpx->unit);

-    break;

-  default:

-	mpx_abort(mpx,"Unknown drawing function %s", s - 2);

-  }

-  mpx->h = (int) floor(mpx->gx + .5);

-  mpx->v = (int) floor(YCORR / mpx->unit + .5 - mpx->gy);

-}

-

-

-

-@ Interpreting Troff Output

-

-@c

-static void mpx_change_font(MPX mpx, int f) {

-    for (mpx->curfont = 0; mpx->curfont < mpx->nfonts; mpx->curfont++)

-	if (mpx->font_num[mpx->curfont] == f)

-	    return;

-    mpx_abort(mpx,"Bad font setting");

-}

-

-

-@ String s0 is everything following the initial `x' in a troff device control

-   command.  A zero result indicates a stop command.

-

-@c

-static int mpx_do_x_cmd(MPX mpx, char *s0)

-{

-    float x;

-    int n;

-    char *s;

-

-    s = s0;

-    while (*s == ' ' || *s == '\t')

-	s++;

-    switch (*s++) {

-    case 'r':

-	if (mpx->unit != 0.0)

-	    mpx_abort(mpx,"Attempt to reset resolution");

-	while (*s != ' ' && *s != '\t')

-	    s++;

-	mpx->unit = mpx_get_float(mpx,s);

-	if (mpx->unit <= 0.0)

-	    mpx_abort(mpx,"Bad resolution: x %s", s0);

-	mpx->unit = 72.0 / mpx->unit;

-	break;

-    case 'f':

-	while (*s != ' ' && *s != '\t')

-	    s++;

-	n = mpx_get_int(mpx,s);

-	if (mpx->arg_tail == NULL)

-	    mpx_abort(mpx,"Bad font def: x %s", s0);

-	s = mpx->arg_tail;

-	while (*s == ' ' || *s == '\t')

-	    s++;

-	mpx_do_font_def(mpx,n, s);

-	break;

-    case 's':

-	return 0;

-    case 'H':

-	while (*s != ' ' && *s != '\t')

-	    s++;

-	mpx->Xheight = mpx_get_float(mpx,s);

-	/* GROFF troff output is scaled |groff_out(5)|: 

-       The argument to the s command is in scaled

-	   points (units of points/n, where n is the argument

-	   to the sizescale command  in the DESC file.)  The

-	   argument to the x Height command is also in scaled points.

-	   sizescale for groff devps is 1000

-	 */

-	if (mpx->sizescale != 0.0) {

-	    if (mpx->unit != 0.0)

-		mpx->Xheight *= mpx->unit;	/* ??? */

-	    else

-		mpx->Xheight /= mpx->sizescale;

-	}

-	if (mpx->Xheight == mpx->cursize)

-	    mpx->Xheight = 0.0;

-	break;

-    case 'S':

-	while (*s != ' ' && *s != '\t')

-	    s++;

-	mpx->Xslant = mpx_get_float(mpx,s) * (PI / 180.0);

-	x = cos(mpx->Xslant);

-	if (-1e-4 < x && x < 1e-4)

-	    mpx_abort(mpx,"Excessive slant");

-	mpx->Xslant = sin(mpx->Xslant) / x;

-	break;

-    default:

-	/* do nothing */ ;

-    }

-    return 1;

-}

-

-

-@ This routine reads commands from the troff output file up to and including

-the next `p' or `x s' command.  It also calls |set_num_char()| and |set_char()|

-to generate output when appropriate.  A zero result indicates that there

-are no more pages to do.

-

-GROFF:

-GNU groff uses an extended device-independent output file format

-documented in |groff_out(5)|. In order to allow parsing of groff's

-output files, this function either needs to be extended to support

-the new command codes, or else the use of the "t" and "u" commands

-must be disabled by removing the line "tcommand" from the DESC file

-in the \$(prefix)/lib/groff/devps directory.

-

-@c

-static int mpx_do_page (MPX mpx, FILE *trf) {

-    char *buf;

-    char a, *c, *cc;

-

-    mpx->h = mpx->v = 0;

-    while ((buf = mpx_getline(mpx, trf)) != NULL) {

-	mpx->lnno++;

-	c = buf;

-	while (*c != '\0') {

-	    switch (*c) {

-	    case ' ':

-	    case '\t':

-	    case 'w':

-		c++;

-		break;

-	    case 's':

-		mpx->cursize = mpx_get_float(mpx,c + 1);

-		/* GROFF troff output is scaled

-		   |groff_out(5)|: The argument to the s command is in scaled

-		   points (units of points/n, where n is the argument

-		   to the sizescale command  in the DESC file.)  The

-		   argument to the x Height command is also in scaled

-		   points.

-		   sizescale for groff devps is 1000

-		 */

-		if (mpx->sizescale != 0.0) {

-		    if (mpx->unit != 0.0)

-			mpx->cursize *= mpx->unit;	/* ??? */

-		    else

-			mpx->cursize /= mpx->sizescale;

-		}

-		goto iarg;

-	    case 'f':

-		mpx_change_font(mpx, mpx_get_int(mpx,c + 1));

-		goto iarg;

-	    case 'c':

-		if (c[1] == '\0')

-		    mpx_abort(mpx, "Bad c command in troff output");

-		cc = c + 2;

-		goto set;

-	    case 'C':

-		cc = c;

-		do

-		    cc++;

-		while (*cc != ' ' && *cc != '\t' && *cc != '\0');

-		goto set;

-	    case 'N':

-		mpx_set_num_char(mpx, (int)mpx->curfont, mpx_get_int(mpx,c + 1));

-		goto iarg;

-	    case 'H':

-		 mpx->h = mpx_get_int(mpx, c + 1);

-		goto iarg;

-	    case 'V':

-		 mpx->v = mpx_get_int(mpx, c + 1);

-		goto iarg;

-	    case 'h':

-		 mpx->h += mpx_get_int(mpx, c + 1);

-		goto iarg;

-	    case 'v':

-		 mpx->v += mpx_get_int(mpx, c + 1);

-		goto iarg;

-	    case '0':

-	    case '1':

-	    case '2':

-	    case '3':

-	    case '4':

-	    case '5':

-	    case '6':

-	    case '7':

-	    case '8':

-	    case '9':

-		if (c[1] < '0' || c[1] > '9' || c[2] == '\0')

-		    mpx_abort(mpx, "Bad nnc command in troff output");

-		 mpx->h += 10 * (c[0] - '0') + c[1] - '0';

-		c++;

-		cc = c + 2;

-		goto set;

-	    case 'p':

-		return 1;

-	    case 'n':

-		(void) mpx_get_int(mpx, c + 1);

-		(void) mpx_get_int(mpx, mpx->arg_tail);

-		goto iarg;

-	    case 'D':

-		mpx_do_graphic(mpx, c + 1);

-		goto eoln;

-	    case 'x':

-		if (!mpx_do_x_cmd(mpx, c + 1))

-		    return 0;

-		goto eoln;

-	    case '#':

-		goto eoln;

-	    case 'F':

-		/* GROFF uses this command to report filename */

-		goto eoln;

-	    case 'm':

-		/* GROFF uses this command to control color */

-		goto eoln;

-	    case 'u':

-		/* GROFF uses this command to output a word with additional

-		   white space between characters, not implemented

-		 */

-		mpx_abort(mpx, "Bad command in troff output\n"

-		     "change the DESC file for your GROFF PostScript device, remove tcommand");

-	    case 't':

-		/* GROFF uses this command to output a word */

-		cc = c;

-		do

-		    cc++;

-		while (*cc != ' ' && *cc != '\t' && *cc != '\0');

-		a = *cc;

-		*cc = '\0';

-		mpx_set_string(mpx, ++c);

-		c = cc;

-		*c = a;

-		continue;

-	    default:

-		mpx_abort(mpx, "Bad command in troff output");

-	    }

-	    continue;

-	  set:

-        a = *cc;

-	    *cc = '\0';

-	    mpx_set_char(mpx, ++c);

-	    c = cc;

-	    *c = a;

-	    continue;

-	  iarg:

-        c = mpx->arg_tail;

-	}

-      eoln:			/* do nothing */ ;

-    }

-    return 0;

-}

-

-

-@ Main Dmp Program

-

-@d dbname "trfonts.map"	/* file for table of troff \& TFM font names */

-@d adjname "trchars.adj" /* file for character shift amounts */

-

-@c

-static int mpx_dmp(MPX mpx, char *infile) {

-    int more;

-    FILE *trf = mpx_xfopen(mpx,infile, "r");

-    mpx_read_desc(mpx);

-    mpx_read_fmap(mpx,dbname);

-    if (!mpx->gflag)

-	  mpx_read_char_adj(mpx,adjname);

-    mpx_open_mpxfile(mpx);

-    if (mpx->banner != NULL)

-      fprintf (mpx->mpxfile,"%s\n",mpx->banner);

-    if (mpx_do_page(mpx, trf)) {

-	  do {

-        @<Do initialization required before starting a new page@>;

-	    mpx_start_picture(mpx);

-	    more = mpx_do_page(mpx,trf);

-	    mpx_stop_picture(mpx);

-	    fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, "mpxbreak\n");

-	  } while (more);

-    }

-    mpx_fclose(mpx,trf);

-    if ( mpx->history<=mpx_cksum_trouble )

-      return 0;

-    else 

-      return mpx->history;

-}

-

-

-@* \[5] Makempx.

-

-

-Make an MPX file from the labels in a MetaPost source file,

-using mpto and either dvitomp (TeX) or dmp (troff).

-

-Started from a shell script initially based on John Hobby's original

-version, that was then translated to C by Akira Kakuto (Aug 1997, 

-Aug 2001), and updated and largely rewritten by Taco Hoekwater (Nov 2006).

-

-

-Differences between the script and this C version:

-

-The script trapped HUP, INT, QUIT and TERM for cleaning up 

-temporary files. This is a refinement, and not portable.

-

-The script put its own directory in front of the

-executable search PATH. This is not portable either, and

-it seems a safe bet that normal users do not have 'mpto', 

-'dvitomp', or 'dmp' commands in their path.  

-

-The command-line '-troff' now also accepts an optional argument.

-

-The troff infile for error diagnostics is renamed "mpxerr.i", 

-not plain "mpxerr".

-

-The original script deleted mpx*.* in the cleanup process. 

-

-That is a bit harder in C, because it requires reading the contents 

-of the current directory.  The current program assumes that 

-opendir(), readdir() and closedir() are known everywhere where 

-the function getcwd() exists (except on WIN32, where it uses

-|_findfirst| \& co).

-

-If this assumption is false, you can define |NO_GETCWD|, and makempx

-will revert to trying to delete only a few known extensions

-

-There is a -debug switch, preventing the removal of tmp files

-

-@d TMPNAME_EXT(a,b) { strcpy(a,tmpname); strcat(a,b); }

-

-@c

-

-#define TEXERR "mpxerr.tex"

-#define DVIERR "mpxerr.dvi"

-#define TROFF_INERR "mpxerr.i"

-#define TROFF_OUTERR "mpxerr.t"

-

-@ @c 

-static void mpx_rename (MPX mpx, const char *a, const char *b) {

-  mpx_report(mpx,"renaming %s to %s",a,b); 

-  rename(a,b); 

-}

-

-@ @<Globals@>=

-char tex[15] ;

-int debug ;

-const char *progname;

-

-@ Cleaning up

-@c

-static void  mpx_default_erasetmp(MPX mpx) {

-    char *wrk;

-    char *p;

-    if (mpx->mode==mpx_tex_mode) {

-      wrk = xstrdup(mpx->tex);

-      p = strrchr(wrk, '.');

-      *p = '\0';  strcat(wrk, ".aux");   remove(wrk);

-      *p = '\0';  strcat(wrk, ".pdf");   remove(wrk);

-      *p = '\0';  strcat(wrk, ".toc");   remove(wrk);

-      *p = '\0';  strcat(wrk, ".idx");   remove(wrk);

-      *p = '\0';  strcat(wrk, ".ent");   remove(wrk);

-      *p = '\0';  strcat(wrk, ".out");   remove(wrk);

-      *p = '\0';  strcat(wrk, ".nav");   remove(wrk);

-      *p = '\0';  strcat(wrk, ".snm");   remove(wrk);

-      *p = '\0';  strcat(wrk, ".tui");   remove(wrk);

-      free(wrk);

-    }

-}

-

-@ @<Declarations@>=

-static void mpx_erasetmp(MPX mpx);

-

-@ @c

-static void mpx_cleandir(MPX mpx, char *cur_path) {

-  char *wrk, *p;

-#ifdef _WIN32

-  struct _finddata_t c_file;

-  long hFile;

-#else

-  struct dirent *entry;

-  DIR *d;

-#endif

-  wrk = xstrdup(mpx->tex);

-  p = strrchr(wrk, '.');

-  *p = '\0'; /* now wrk is identical to tmpname */ 

-

-#ifdef _WIN32

-  strcat(cur_path,"/*");

-  if ((hFile = _findfirst (cur_path, &c_file)) == -1L) {

-    mpx_default_erasetmp(mpx);

-  } else {

-    if (strstr(c_file.name,wrk)==c_file.name) 

-	  remove(c_file.name);

-	while (_findnext (hFile, &c_file) != -1L) {

-	  if (strstr(c_file.name,wrk)==c_file.name) 

-	    remove(c_file.name);

-	}

-	_findclose (hFile); /* no more entries => close directory */

-  }

-#else

-  if ((d = opendir(cur_path)) == NULL) {

-	mpx_default_erasetmp(mpx);

-  } else {

-	while ((entry = readdir (d)) != NULL) {

-      if (strstr(entry->d_name,wrk)==entry->d_name) 

-	    remove(entry->d_name);

-	}

-    closedir(d);

-  }

-#endif	    

-  free(wrk);

-}

-

-

-@ It is important that |mpx_erasetmp| remains silent.

-If it find trouble, it should just ignore it.

-

-The string |cur_path| is a little bit larger than needed, because that 

-allows the win32 code in |cleandir| to add the slash and asterisk for 

-globbing without having to reallocate the variable first.

-

-@c

-#ifdef WIN32

-#define GETCWD _getcwd

-#else

-#define GETCWD getcwd

-#endif

-static void mpx_erasetmp(MPX mpx) {

-  char cur_path[1024];

-  if (mpx->debug)

-	return;

-  if (mpx->tex[0] != '\0') {

-    remove(mpx->tex);

-    if(GETCWD(cur_path,1020) == NULL) {

-      mpx_default_erasetmp(mpx); /* don't know where we are */

-    } else {

-      mpx_cleandir(mpx,cur_path);

-    }

-  }

-}

-

-

-@* Running the external typesetters.

-

-First, here is a helper for messaging.

-

-@c

-static char *mpx_print_command (MPX mpx, int cmdlength, char **cmdline) {

-  char *s, *t;

-  int i,l;

-  (void)mpx;

-  l = 0;

-  for (i = 0; i < cmdlength ; i++) {

-     l += strlen(cmdline[i])+1;

-  }

-  s = xmalloc((size_t)l,1); t=s;

-  for (i = 0; i < cmdlength ; i++) {

-    if (i>0) *t++ = ' ';

-    t = strcpy(t,cmdline[i]);

-    t += strlen(cmdline[i]);

-  }

-  return s;

-}

-

-@ This function unifies the external program calling across Posix-like and Win32

-systems.

-

-@c

-static int do_spawn (MPX mpx, char *icmd, char **options) {

-#ifndef WIN32

-  pid_t child;

-#endif

-  int retcode = -1;

-  char * cmd = xmalloc(strlen(icmd)+1,1);

-  if (icmd[0] != '"') {

-    strcpy(cmd,icmd);

-  } else {

-    strncpy(cmd,icmd+1,strlen(icmd)-2);

-    cmd[strlen(icmd)-2] = 0;

-  }

-#ifndef WIN32

-  child = fork();

-  if (child < 0) 

-    mpx_abort(mpx, "fork failed: %s", strerror(errno));

-  if (child == 0) {

-    if(execvp(cmd, options))

-      mpx_abort(mpx, "exec failed: %s", strerror(errno));

-  } else {

-    if (wait(&retcode)==child) {

-      retcode = (WIFEXITED(retcode) ? WEXITSTATUS(retcode) : -1);

-    } else {

-      mpx_abort(mpx, "wait failed: %s", strerror(errno));

-    }  

-  }

-#else

-  retcode = spawnvp(P_WAIT, cmd, (const char **)options);

-#endif

-  xfree(cmd);

-  return retcode;

-}

-

-@ @c

-#ifdef WIN32

-#define nuldev "nul"

-#else

-#define nuldev "/dev/null"

-#endif

-static int mpx_run_command(MPX mpx, char *inname, char *outname, int count, char **cmdl) {

-    char *s;

-    int retcode;

-    int sav_o, sav_i; /* for I/O redirection */

-    FILE *fr, *fw;    /* read and write streams for the command */

-

-    if (count < 1 || cmdl == NULL || cmdl[0] == NULL)

-	  return -1; /* return non-zero by default, signalling an error */

-     

-    s = mpx_print_command(mpx,count, cmdl);

-    mpx_report(mpx,"running command %s", s);

-    free(s);

-    

-    fr = mpx_xfopen(mpx,(inname ? inname : nuldev), "r");

-    fw = mpx_xfopen(mpx,(outname ? outname : nuldev), "wb");

-    @<Save and redirect the standard I/O@>;

-    retcode = do_spawn(mpx,cmdl[0], cmdl);

-    @<Restore the standard I/O@>;

-    mpx_fclose(mpx,fr);

-    mpx_fclose(mpx,fw);

-    return retcode;

-}

-

-@ @ Running Troff is more likely than not a series of pipes that 

-feed input to each other. Makempx does all of this itself by using

-temporary files inbetween. That means we have to juggle about with

-|stdin| and |stdout|.

-

-This is the only non-ansi C bit of makempx.

-@^system dependencies@>

-

-@<Save and redirect the standard I/O@>=

-#ifdef WIN32

-#define DUP _dup

-#define DUPP _dup2

-#else

-#define DUP dup

-#define DUPP dup2

-#endif

-sav_i = DUP(fileno(stdin));

-sav_o = DUP(fileno(stdout));

-DUPP(fileno(fr), fileno(stdin));

-DUPP(fileno(fw), fileno(stdout))

-

-@ @<Restore the standard I/O@>=

-DUPP(sav_i, fileno(stdin));

-close(sav_i);

-DUPP(sav_o, fileno(stdout));

-close(sav_o)

-

-@ The allocation of the array pointed to by |cmdline_addr| is of

-course much larger than is really needed, but it will still only be a

-few hunderd bytes at the most, and this ensures that the separate

-parts of the |maincmd| will all fit.

-

-@d split_command(a,b) mpx_do_split_command(mpx,a,&b,' ')

-@d split_pipes(a,b)   mpx_do_split_command(mpx,a,&b,'|')

-

-@c

-static int

-mpx_do_split_command(MPX mpx, char *maincmd, char ***cmdline_addr, char target) {

-  char *piece;

-  char *cmd;

-  char **cmdline;

-  size_t i;

-  int ret = 0;

-  int in_string = 0;

-  if (strlen(maincmd) == 0)

-    return 0;

-  i = sizeof(char *)*(strlen(maincmd)+1);

-  cmdline = xmalloc(i,1);

-  memset(cmdline,0,i);

-  *cmdline_addr = cmdline;

-

-  i = 0;

-  while (maincmd[i] == ' ')

-	i++;

-  cmd = xstrdup(maincmd);

-  piece = cmd;

-  for (; i <= strlen(maincmd); i++) {

-    if (in_string == 1) {

-	  if (cmd[i] == '"') {

-	    in_string = 0;

-	  }

-	} else if (in_string == 2) {

-	  if (cmd[i] == '\'') {

-		in_string = 0;

-	  }

-	} else {

-	  if (cmd[i] == '"') {

-		in_string = 1;

-	  } else if (cmd[i] == '\'') {

-		in_string = 2;

-	  } else if (cmd[i] == target) {

-		cmd[i] = 0;

-		cmdline[ret++] = piece;

-		while (i < strlen(maincmd) && cmd[(i + 1)] == ' ')

-		    i++;

-		piece = cmd + i + 1;

-	  }

-	}

-  }

-  if (*piece) {

-	cmdline[ret++] = piece;

-  }

-  return ret;

-}

-

-@ @<Globals@>=

-char *maincmd;    /* TeX command name */

-

-@ @c

-static void mpx_command_cleanup (MPX mpx, char **cmdline) {

-  (void)mpx;

-  xfree(cmdline[0]);

-  xfree(cmdline);

-}

-

-

-

-@ @c

-static void mpx_command_error (MPX mpx, int cmdlength, char **cmdline) {

-  char *s = mpx_print_command(mpx, cmdlength, cmdline);

-  mpx_command_cleanup(mpx, cmdline);

-  mpx_abort(mpx, "Command failed: %s; see mpxerr.log", s);

-}

-

-

-

-@ @(mpxout.h@>=

-typedef struct mpx_options {

-  int mode;

-  char *cmd;

-  char *mptexpre;

-  char *mpname;

-  char *mpxname;

-  char *banner;

-  int debug;

-  mpx_file_finder find_file;

-} mpx_options;

-int mpx_makempx (mpx_options *mpxopt) ;

-int mpx_run_dvitomp (mpx_options *mpxopt) ;

-

- 

-@ 

-

-@d ERRLOG "mpxerr.log"

-@d MPXLOG "makempx.log"

-

-@c

-int mpx_makempx (mpx_options *mpxopt) {

-    MPX mpx;

-    char **cmdline, **cmdbits;

-    char infile[15];

-    int retcode, i ;

-    char tmpname[] = "mpXXXXXX";

-    int cmdlength = 1;

-    int cmdbitlength = 1;

-    if (!mpxopt->debug) {

-      @<Check if mp file is newer than mpxfile, exit if not@>;

-    }

-    mpx = malloc(sizeof(struct mpx_data));

-    if (mpx==NULL || mpxopt->cmd==NULL || mpxopt->mpname==NULL || mpxopt->mpxname==NULL)

-      return mpx_fatal_error;

-    mpx_initialize(mpx);

-    if (mpxopt->banner!=NULL)

-      mpx->banner = mpxopt->banner;

-    mpx->mode = mpxopt->mode;

-    mpx->debug = mpxopt->debug;

-    if (mpxopt->find_file!=NULL)

-      mpx->find_file = mpxopt->find_file;

-    if (mpxopt->cmd!=NULL)

-      mpx->maincmd = xstrdup(mpxopt->cmd); /* valgrind says this leaks */

-    mpx->mpname = xstrdup(mpxopt->mpname);

-    mpx->mpxname = xstrdup(mpxopt->mpxname);

-    @<Install and test the non-local jump buffer@>;

-

-    if (mpx->debug) {

-      mpx->errfile = stderr;

-    } else {

-      mpx->errfile = mpx_xfopen(mpx,MPXLOG, "wb");

-    }

-    mpx->progname = "makempx";

-    @<Initialize the |tmpname| variable@>;

-    if (mpxopt->mptexpre == NULL)

-      mpxopt->mptexpre = xstrdup("mptexpre.tex");

-    @<Run |mpto| on the mp file@>;

-    if (mpxopt->cmd==NULL)

-      goto DONE;

-    if (mpx->mode == mpx_tex_mode) {

-      @<Run |TeX| and set up |infile| or abort@>;

-      if (mpx_dvitomp(mpx, infile)) {

-	    mpx_rename(mpx, infile,DVIERR);

-	    if (!mpx->debug)

-	      remove(mpx->mpxname);

-	    mpx_abort(mpx, "Dvi conversion failed: %s %s\n",

-	                    DVIERR, mpx->mpxname);

-      }

-    } else if (mpx->mode == mpx_troff_mode) {

-      @<Run |Troff| and set up |infile| or abort@>;

-      if (mpx_dmp(mpx, infile)) {

-	    mpx_rename(mpx,infile, TROFF_OUTERR);

-        mpx_rename(mpx,mpx->tex, TROFF_INERR);

-	    if (!mpx->debug)

-	      remove(mpx->mpxname);

-	    mpx_abort(mpx, "Troff conversion failed: %s %s\n",

-	                    TROFF_OUTERR, mpx->mpxname);

-      }

-    }

-    mpx_fclose(mpx,mpx->mpxfile);

-    if (!mpx->debug)

-      mpx_fclose(mpx,mpx->errfile);

-    if (!mpx->debug) {

-	  remove(MPXLOG);

-	  remove(ERRLOG);

-   	  remove(infile);

-    }

-    mpx_erasetmp(mpx);

-  DONE:

-    retcode = mpx->history;

-    mpx_xfree(mpx->buf);

-    mpx_xfree(mpx->maincmd);

-    for (i = 0; i < (int)mpx->nfonts; i++)

-      mpx_xfree(mpx->font_name[i]);

-    free(mpx);

-    if (retcode == mpx_cksum_trouble)

-       retcode = 0;

-    return retcode;

-}

-int mpx_run_dvitomp (mpx_options *mpxopt) {

-    MPX mpx;

-    int retcode, i ;

-    mpx = malloc(sizeof(struct mpx_data));

-    if (mpx==NULL || mpxopt->mpname==NULL || mpxopt->mpxname==NULL)

-      return mpx_fatal_error;

-    mpx_initialize(mpx);

-    if (mpxopt->banner!=NULL)

-      mpx->banner = mpxopt->banner;

-    mpx->mode = mpxopt->mode;

-    mpx->debug = mpxopt->debug;

-    if (mpxopt->find_file!=NULL)

-      mpx->find_file = mpxopt->find_file;

-    mpx->mpname = xstrdup(mpxopt->mpname);

-    mpx->mpxname = xstrdup(mpxopt->mpxname);

-    @<Install and test the non-local jump buffer@>;

-    if (mpx->debug) {

-      mpx->errfile = stderr;

-    } else {

-      mpx->errfile = mpx_xfopen(mpx,MPXLOG, "wb");

-    }

-    mpx->progname = "dvitomp";

-    if (mpx_dvitomp(mpx, mpx->mpname)) {

-	  if (!mpx->debug)

-	    remove(mpx->mpxname);

-	  mpx_abort(mpx, "Dvi conversion failed: %s %s\n",

-	                  DVIERR, mpx->mpxname);

-    }

-    mpx_fclose(mpx,mpx->mpxfile);

-    if (!mpx->debug)

-      mpx_fclose(mpx,mpx->errfile);

-    if (!mpx->debug) {

-	  remove(MPXLOG);

-	  remove(ERRLOG);

-    }

-    mpx_erasetmp(mpx);

-    retcode = mpx->history;

-    mpx_xfree(mpx->buf);

-    for (i = 0; i < (int)mpx->nfonts; i++)

-      mpx_xfree(mpx->font_name[i]);

-    free(mpx);

-    if (retcode == mpx_cksum_trouble)

-       retcode = 0;

-    return retcode;

-}

-

-

-@ \TeX\ has to operate on an actual input file, so we have to append

-that to the command line.

-

-@<Run |TeX| and set ...@>=

-{

-  char log[15];

-  mpx->maincmd = xrealloc(mpx->maincmd,strlen(mpx->maincmd)+strlen(mpx->tex)+2,1);

-  strcat(mpx->maincmd, " ");

-  strcat(mpx->maincmd, mpx->tex);

-  cmdlength = split_command(mpx->maincmd, cmdline);

-

-  retcode = mpx_run_command(mpx, NULL, NULL, cmdlength, cmdline);

-

-  TMPNAME_EXT(log, ".log");

-  if (!retcode) {

-    TMPNAME_EXT(infile, ".dvi");

-    remove(log);

-  } else {

-    mpx_rename(mpx,mpx->tex, TEXERR);

-    mpx_rename(mpx,log, ERRLOG);

-    mpx_command_error(mpx, cmdlength, cmdline);

-  }

-  mpx_command_cleanup(mpx, cmdline);

-}

-

-@ @<Run |Troff| and set ...@>=

-{

-  char *cur_in, *cur_out;

-  char tmp_a[15], tmp_b[15];

-  TMPNAME_EXT(tmp_a, ".t");   

-  TMPNAME_EXT(tmp_b, ".tmp");

-  cur_in = mpx->tex;

-  cur_out = tmp_a;

-

-  /* split the command in bits */

-  cmdbitlength = split_pipes(mpx->maincmd, cmdbits);

-  cmdline = NULL;

-

-  for (i = 0; i < cmdbitlength; i++) {

-    if (cmdline!=NULL) free(cmdline);

-    cmdlength = split_command(cmdbits[i], cmdline);

-    retcode = mpx_run_command(mpx, cur_in, cur_out, cmdlength, cmdline);

-	    

-    if (retcode) {

-	  mpx_rename(mpx,mpx->tex, TROFF_INERR);

-      mpx_command_error(mpx, cmdlength, cmdline);

-    }

-    if (i < cmdbitlength - 1) {

-	  if (i % 2 == 0) {

-        cur_in = tmp_a;

-        cur_out = tmp_b;

-	  } else {

-        cur_in = tmp_b;

-        cur_out = tmp_a;

-	  }

-    }

-  }

-  if (tmp_a!=cur_out) { remove(tmp_a); }

-  if (tmp_b!=cur_out) { remove(tmp_b); }

-  strcpy(infile,cur_out);

-}

-

-@ If MPX file is up-to-date or if MP file does not exist, do nothing. 

-

-@<Check if mp file is newer than mpxfile, exit if not@>=

-if (mpx_newer(mpxopt->mpname, mpxopt->mpxname))

-   return 0

-

-

-@  The splint comment is here because this use of |sprintf()| is definately safe

-

-@<Initialize the |tmpname| variable@>=

-@= /*@@-bufferoverflowhigh@@*/ @> 

-#ifdef HAVE_MKSTEMP

-    i = mkstemp(tmpname);

-    if (i == -1) {

-      sprintf(tmpname, "mp%06d", (int)(time(NULL) % 1000000));

-    } else {

-      close(i);

-      remove(tmpname);

-    }

-#else

-#ifdef HAVE_MKTEMP

-  {

-    char *tmpstring = mktemp(tmpname);

-    if ((tmpstring == NULL) || strlen(tmpname) == 0) {

-      sprintf(tmpname, "mp%06d", (int)(time(NULL) % 1000000));

-    } else {

-      /* this should not really be needed, but better

-         safe than sorry. */

-      if (tmpstring != tmpname) {

-	    i = strlen(tmpstring);

-	    if (i > 8) i = 8;

-	      strncpy(tmpname, tmpstring, i);

-      }

-    }

-  }

-#else

-    sprintf(tmpname, "mp%06d", (int)(time(NULL) % 1000000));

-#endif

-#endif

-@= /*@@+bufferoverflowhigh@@*/ @> 

+% $Id: mpxout.w 1061 2009-05-27 13:01:37Z taco $
+%
+% Copyright 2008-2009 Taco Hoekwater.
+%
+% This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify
+% it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by
+% the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or
+% (at your option) any later version.
+%
+% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+% GNU Lesser General Public License for more details.
+%
+% You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License
+% along with this program.  If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
+
+\def\title{Creating mpx files}
+\def\hang{\hangindent 3em\indent\ignorespaces}
+\def\MP{MetaPost}
+\def\LaTeX{{\rm L\kern-.36em\raise.3ex\hbox{\sc a}\kern-.15em
+    T\kern-.1667em\lower.7ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX}}
+
+\def\(#1){} % this is used to make section names sort themselves better
+\def\9#1{} % this is used for sort keys in the index
+\def\[#1]{#1.}
+
+\pdfoutput=1
+
+@* \[1] Makempx overview.
+
+This source file implements the makempx functionality for the new \MP.
+It includes all of the functional code from the old standalone programs
+
+\item{}mpto
+\item{}dmp
+\item{}dvitomp
+\item{}makempx
+
+combined into one, with many changes to make all of the code cooperate
+nicely.
+
+@ Header files
+
+The local C preprocessor definitions have to come after the C includes
+in order to prevent name clashes.
+
+@c
+#include "config.h"
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <string.h>
+#include <stdarg.h>
+#include <assert.h>
+#include <setjmp.h>
+#include <errno.h> /* TODO autoconf ? */
+/* unistd.h is needed for every non-Win32 platform, and we assume
+ * that implies that sys/types.h is also present 
+ */
+#ifndef WIN32
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+#endif
+/* processes */
+#ifdef WIN32
+#include <io.h>
+#include <process.h>
+#else
+#if HAVE_SYS_WAIT_H
+# include <sys/wait.h>
+#endif
+#ifndef WEXITSTATUS
+# define WEXITSTATUS(stat_val) ((unsigned)(stat_val) >> 8)
+#endif
+#ifndef WIFEXITED
+# define WIFEXITED(stat_val) (((stat_val) & 255) == 0)
+#endif
+#endif
+/* directories */
+#ifdef WIN32
+#include <direct.h>
+#else
+#if HAVE_DIRENT_H
+# include <dirent.h>
+#else
+# define dirent direct
+# if HAVE_SYS_NDIR_H
+#  include <sys/ndir.h>
+# endif
+# if HAVE_SYS_DIR_H
+#  include <sys/dir.h>
+# endif
+# if HAVE_NDIR_H
+#  include <ndir.h>
+# endif
+#endif
+#endif
+#if HAVE_SYS_STAT_H
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+#endif
+#include <ctype.h>
+#include <time.h>
+#include <math.h>
+#define trunc(x)   ((integer) (x))
+#define fabs(x)    ((x)<0?(-(x)):(x))
+#define floor(x)   ((integer) (fabs(x)))
+#ifndef PI
+#define PI  3.14159265358979323846
+#endif
+#include "avl.h"
+#include "mpxout.h"
+@h
+
+@ Data types
+
+From the Pascal code of DVItoMP two implicit types are inherited: |web_boolean| and
+|web_integer|. 
+
+The more complex datatypes are defined in the following sections. 
+
+@d true 1
+@d false 0
+
+@c
+typedef signed int web_integer;
+typedef signed int web_boolean;
+@<C Data Types@>
+@<Declarations@>
+
+@ The single most important data structure is the structure
+|mpx_data|.  It contains all of the global state for a specific
+|makempx| run. A pointer to it is passed as the first argument to just
+about every function call.
+
+One of the fields is a bit special because it is so important: |mode|
+is the decider between running \TeX\ or Troff as the typesetting
+engine.
+
+@(mpxout.h@>=
+typedef enum {
+  mpx_tex_mode=0,
+  mpx_troff_mode=1 
+} mpx_modes;
+typedef struct mpx_data * MPX;
+
+@ @<C Data Types@>=
+@<Types in the outer block@>
+typedef struct mpx_data {
+  int mode;
+  @<Globals@>
+} mpx_data ;
+
+@ Here are some macros for common programming idioms.
+
+@d MAXINT 0x7FFFFF /* somewhat arbitrary */
+
+@d incr(A)   (A)=(A)+1 /* increase a variable by unity */
+@d decr(A)   (A)=(A)-1 /* decrease a variable by unity */
+
+@ Once an MPX object is allocated, the memory it occupies needs to be
+initialized to a usable state. This procedure gets things started
+properly.
+
+This function is not allowed to run |mpx_abort| because at this
+point the jump buffer is not yet initialized, so it should only
+be used for things that cannot go wrong!
+
+@c
+static void mpx_initialize (MPX mpx) {
+  memset(mpx,0,sizeof(struct mpx_data));
+  @<Set initial values@>@/
+}
+
+@ A global variable |history| keeps track of what type of errors have
+occurred with the hope that that \MP\ can be warned of any problems.
+
+@<Types...@>=
+enum mpx_history_states {
+ mpx_spotless=0, /* |history| value when no problems have been found */
+ mpx_cksum_trouble, /* |history| value there have been font checksum mismatches */
+ mpx_warning_given, /* |history| value after a recoverable error */
+ mpx_fatal_error /* |history| value if processing had to be aborted */
+};
+
+
+@ @<Glob...@>=
+int history;
+
+@ @<Set init...@>=
+mpx->history=mpx_spotless;
+
+@ The structure has room for the names and the |FILE *| for the 
+input and output files. The most important ones are listed here,
+the variables for the intermediate files are declared where they
+are needed.
+
+@<Globals@>=
+char *banner;
+char *mpname;
+FILE *mpfile;
+char *mpxname;
+FILE *mpxfile;
+FILE *errfile;
+int lnno ;           /* current line number */
+
+@ A set of basic reporting functions. 
+
+@c
+static void mpx_printf(MPX mpx, const char *header, const char *msg, va_list ap) {
+  fprintf(mpx->errfile, "makempx %s: %s:", header, mpx->mpname);
+  if (mpx->lnno!=0)
+    fprintf(mpx->errfile, "%d:", mpx->lnno);
+  fprintf(mpx->errfile, " ");
+  (void)vfprintf(mpx->errfile, msg, ap);
+  fprintf(mpx->errfile, "\n");
+}
+
+@ @c
+static void mpx_report(MPX mpx, const char *msg, ...) {
+  va_list ap;
+  if (mpx->debug==0) return;
+  va_start(ap, msg);
+  mpx_printf(mpx, "debug", msg, ap);
+  va_end(ap);
+  if ( mpx->history < mpx_warning_given ) 
+    mpx->history=mpx_cksum_trouble;
+}
+ 
+@ @c
+static void mpx_warn(MPX mpx, const char *msg, ...) {
+  va_list ap;
+  va_start(ap, msg);
+  mpx_printf(mpx, "warning", msg, ap);
+  va_end(ap);
+  if ( mpx->history < mpx_warning_given ) 
+    mpx->history=mpx_cksum_trouble;
+}
+
+@ @c
+static void mpx_error(MPX mpx, const char *msg, ...) {
+  va_list ap;
+  va_start(ap, msg);
+  mpx_printf(mpx, "error", msg, ap);
+  va_end(ap);
+  mpx->history=mpx_warning_given;
+}
+
+@  The program uses a |jump_buf| to handle non-local returns, 
+this is initialized at a single spot: the start of |mp_makempx|.
+
+@d mpx_jump_out longjmp(mpx->jump_buf,1)
+
+@<Glob...@>=
+jmp_buf jump_buf;
+
+@ 
+@c
+static void mpx_abort(MPX mpx, const char *msg, ...) {
+  va_list ap;
+  va_start(ap, msg);
+  fprintf(stderr, "fatal: ");
+  (void)vfprintf(stderr, msg, ap);
+  mpx_printf(mpx, "fatal", msg, ap);
+  va_end(ap);
+  mpx->history=mpx_fatal_error;
+  mpx_erasetmp(mpx);
+  mpx_jump_out;
+}
+
+@ @<Install and test the non-local jump buffer@>=
+if (setjmp(mpx->jump_buf) != 0) { 
+  int h = mpx->history;
+  xfree(mpx->buf);
+  xfree(mpx->maincmd);
+  xfree(mpx->mpname);
+  xfree(mpx->mpxname);
+  xfree(mpx);
+  return h; 
+}
+
+@ @c
+static FILE *mpx_xfopen (MPX mpx, const char *fname, const char *fmode) {
+  FILE *f  = fopen(fname,fmode);
+  if (f == NULL)
+    mpx_abort(mpx,"File open error for %s in mode %s", fname, fmode);
+  return f;
+}
+static void mpx_fclose (MPX mpx, FILE *file) {
+  (void)mpx;
+  (void)fclose(file);
+}
+
+@ 
+@d xfree(A) do { mpx_xfree(A); A=NULL; } while (0)
+@d xrealloc(P,A,B) mpx_xrealloc(mpx,P,A,B)
+@d xmalloc(A,B)  mpx_xmalloc(mpx,A,B)
+@d xstrdup(A)  mpx_xstrdup(mpx,A)
+
+@<Declarations@>=
+static void mpx_xfree (void *x);
+static void *mpx_xrealloc (MPX mpx, void *p, size_t nmem, size_t size) ;
+static void *mpx_xmalloc (MPX mpx, size_t nmem, size_t size) ;
+static char *mpx_xstrdup(MPX mpX, const char *s);
+
+
+@ The |max_size_test| guards against overflow, on the assumption that
+|size_t| is at least 31bits wide.
+
+@d max_size_test 0x7FFFFFFF
+
+@c
+static void mpx_xfree (void *x) {
+  if (x!=NULL) free(x);
+}
+static void  *mpx_xrealloc (MPX mpx, void *p, size_t nmem, size_t size) {
+  void *w ; 
+  if ((max_size_test/size)<nmem) {
+    mpx_abort(mpx,"Memory size overflow");
+  }
+  w = realloc (p,(nmem*size));
+  if (w==NULL) mpx_abort(mpx,"Out of Memory");
+  return w;
+}
+static void  *mpx_xmalloc (MPX mpx, size_t nmem, size_t size) {
+  void *w;
+  if ((max_size_test/size)<nmem) {
+    mpx_abort(mpx,"Memory size overflow");
+  }
+  w = malloc (nmem*size);
+  if (w==NULL) mpx_abort(mpx,"Out of Memory");
+  return w;
+}
+static char *mpx_xstrdup(MPX mpx, const char *s) {
+  char *w; 
+  if (s==NULL)
+    return NULL;
+  w = strdup(s);
+  if (w==NULL) mpx_abort(mpx,"Out of Memory");
+  return w;
+}
+@* The command 'newer' became a function.
+
+We may have high-res timers in struct stat.  If we do, use them. 
+
+@c
+static int mpx_newer(char *source, char *target) {
+    struct stat source_stat, target_stat;
+#if HAVE_SYS_STAT_H
+    if (stat(target, &target_stat) < 0) return 0; /* true */
+    if (stat(source, &source_stat) < 0) return 1; /* false */
+#if HAVE_STRUCT_STAT_ST_MTIM
+    if (source_stat.st_mtim.tv_sec > target_stat.st_mtim.tv_sec || 
+         (source_stat.st_mtim.tv_sec  == target_stat.st_mtim.tv_sec && 
+          source_stat.st_mtim.tv_nsec >= target_stat.st_mtim.tv_nsec))
+  	  return 0;
+#else
+    if (source_stat.st_mtime >= target_stat.st_mtime)
+  	  return 0;
+#endif
+#endif
+    return 1;
+}
+
+
+
+@* Extracting data from \MP\ input.
+
+This part of the program transforms a \MP\ input file into a \TeX\ or
+troff input file by stripping out \.{btex}$\ldots$\.{etex} and 
+\.{verbatimtex}$\ldots$\.{etex} sections.  
+Leading and trailing spaces and tabs are removed from the
+extracted material and it is surrounded by the preceding and following
+strings defined immediately below.  The input file should be given as
+argument 1 and the resulting \TeX\ or troff file is written on standard
+output.
+
+John Hobby wrote the original version, which has since been
+extensively altered. The current implementation is a bit trickier 
+than I would like, but changing it will take careful study and 
+will likely make it run slower, so I've left it as-is for now.
+
+@<Globals@>=
+int texcnt ;         /* btex..etex blocks so far */
+int verbcnt ;        /* verbatimtex..etex blocks so far */
+char *bb, *tt, *aa;     /* start of before, token, and after strings */
+char *buf;      /* the input line */
+unsigned bufsize;
+
+@ @<Set initial values@>=
+mpx->bufsize = 1000;
+
+@ This function returns NULL on EOF, otherwise it returns |buf|. 
+
+@c 
+static char *mpx_getline(MPX mpx, FILE *mpfile) {
+    int c;
+    unsigned loc = 0;
+    if (feof(mpfile))
+      return NULL; 
+    if (mpx->buf==NULL)
+      mpx->buf = xmalloc(mpx->bufsize,1);
+    while ((c = getc(mpfile)) != EOF && c != '\n' && c != '\r') {
+      mpx->buf[loc++] = c;
+      if (loc == mpx->bufsize) {
+        char *temp = mpx->buf;
+        unsigned n = mpx->bufsize + (mpx->bufsize>>4);
+        if (n>MAXINT) 
+          mpx_abort(mpx,"Line is too long");
+        mpx->buf = xmalloc(n,1);
+        memcpy(mpx->buf,temp,mpx->bufsize);
+        free(temp);
+        mpx->bufsize = n;
+      }
+    }
+    mpx->buf[loc] = 0;
+    if (c == '\r') {
+        c = getc(mpfile);
+        if (c != '\n')
+            ungetc(c, mpfile);
+    }
+    mpx->lnno++;
+    return mpx->buf;
+}
+
+
+@ Return nonzero if a prefix of string $s$ matches the null-terminated string $t$
+and the next character is not a letter or an underscore.
+
+@c
+static int mpx_match_str(const char *s, const char *t) {
+    while (*t != 0) {
+        if (*s != *t)
+            return 0;
+        s++;       
+        t++;    
+    }
+    if ((*s>= 'a' && *s<='z') || (*s>= 'A' && *s<='Z') || *s == '_')
+        return 0;
+    return 1;
+}
+
+
+@ This function tries to express $s$ as the concatenation of three
+strings $b$, $t$, $a$, with the global pointers $bb$, $tt$, and $aa$ set to the
+start of the corresponding strings.  String $t$ is either a quote mark,
+a percent sign, or an alphabetic token \.{btex}, \.{etex}, or
+\.{verbatimtex}.  (An alphabetic token is a maximal sequence of letters
+and underscores.)  If there are several possible substrings $t$, we
+choose the leftmost one.  If there is no such $t$, we set $b=s$ and return 0.
+ 
+@c
+static int mpx_getbta(MPX mpx, char *s) {
+  int ok = 1;         /* zero if last character was |a-z|, |A-Z|, or |_| */
+  mpx->bb = s;
+  if (s==NULL) {
+    mpx->tt = NULL;
+    mpx->aa = NULL;
+    return 0;
+  }
+  for (mpx->tt = mpx->bb; *(mpx->tt) != 0; mpx->tt++) {
+    switch (*(mpx->tt)) {
+    case '"':
+    case '%':
+        mpx->aa = mpx->tt + 1;
+        return 1;
+    case 'b':
+        if (ok && mpx_match_str(mpx->tt, "btex")) {
+        mpx->aa = mpx->tt + 4;
+        return 1;
+        } else
+        ok = 0;
+        break;
+    case 'e':
+        if (ok && mpx_match_str(mpx->tt, "etex")) {
+        mpx->aa = mpx->tt + 4;
+        return 1;
+        } else
+        ok = 0;
+        break;
+    case 'v':
+        if (ok && mpx_match_str(mpx->tt, "verbatimtex")) {
+        mpx->aa = mpx->tt + 11;
+        return 1;
+        } else
+        ok = 0;
+        break;
+    default:
+       if ((*(mpx->tt) >= 'a' && *(mpx->tt) <= 'z') ||
+           (*(mpx->tt) >= 'A' && *(mpx->tt) <= 'Z') ||
+           (*(mpx->tt) == '_'))
+         ok = 0;
+       else
+         ok = 1;
+     }
+  }
+  mpx->aa = mpx->tt;
+  return 0;
+}
+
+@ @c
+static void mpx_copy_mpto (MPX mpx, FILE *outfile) {
+    char *s;            /* where a string to print stops */
+    char *t;            /* for finding start of last line */
+    char c;
+    char *res = NULL;
+    do {
+    if (mpx->aa == NULL || *mpx->aa == 0) {
+      if ((mpx->aa = mpx_getline(mpx,mpx->mpfile)) == NULL) {
+        mpx_error(mpx,"btex section does not end"); 
+        return;
+      }
+    }
+    if (mpx_getbta(mpx, mpx->aa) && *(mpx->tt) == 'e') {
+      s = mpx->tt;
+    } else {
+      if (mpx->tt == NULL) {
+        mpx_error(mpx,"btex section does not end"); 
+        return;
+      } else if (*(mpx->tt) == 'b') {
+        mpx_error(mpx,"btex in TeX mode");
+        return;
+      } else if (*(mpx->tt) == 'v') {
+        mpx_error(mpx,"verbatimtex in TeX mode");
+        return;
+      }
+      s = mpx->aa;
+    }
+    c = *s;
+    *s = 0;
+    if (res==NULL) {
+      res = xmalloc(strlen(mpx->bb)+2,1);
+      res = strncpy(res,mpx->bb,(strlen(mpx->bb)+1));
+    } else {
+      res = xrealloc(res,strlen(res)+strlen(mpx->bb)+2,1);
+      res = strncat(res,mpx->bb, strlen(mpx->bb));
+    }
+    if (c == '\0')
+        res = strncat(res, "\n", 1);
+    *s = c;
+    } while (*(mpx->tt) != 'e');
+    /* whitespace at the end */
+    for (s = res + strlen(res) - 1;
+         s >= res && (*s == ' ' || *s == '\t' || *s == '\r' || *s == '\n'); s--);
+    t = s;
+    *(++s) = '\0';
+    /* whitespace at the start */
+    for (s = res;
+         s < (res + strlen(res)) && (*s == ' ' || *s == '\t' || *s == '\r'
+                     || *s == '\n'); s++);
+    for (; *t != '\n' && t > s; t--);
+    fprintf(outfile,"%s", s);
+    /* put no |%| at end if it's only 1 line total, starting with |%|;
+     * this covers the special case |%&format| in a single line. */
+    if (t != s || *t != '%')
+    fprintf(outfile,"%%");
+    free(res);
+}
+
+
+@ Static strings for mpto
+
+@c
+static const char *mpx_predoc[]  = {"", ".po 0\n"};
+static const char *mpx_postdoc[] = { "\\end{document}\n", ""};
+static const char *mpx_pretex1[] = { 
+    "\\gdef\\mpxshipout{\\shipout\\hbox\\bgroup%\n"
+    "  \\setbox0=\\hbox\\bgroup}%\n"
+    "\\gdef\\stopmpxshipout{\\egroup"
+    "  \\dimen0=\\ht0 \\advance\\dimen0\\dp0\n"
+    "  \\dimen1=\\ht0 \\dimen2=\\dp0\n"
+    "  \\setbox0=\\hbox\\bgroup\n"
+    "    \\box0\n"
+    "    \\ifnum\\dimen0>0 \\vrule width1sp height\\dimen1 depth\\dimen2 \n"
+    "    \\else \\vrule width1sp height1sp depth0sp\\relax\n"
+    "    \\fi\\egroup\n"
+    "  \\ht0=0pt \\dp0=0pt \\box0 \\egroup}\n"
+    "\\mpxshipout%% line %d %s\n", ".lf %d %s\n" };
+static const char *mpx_pretex[] = { "\\mpxshipout%% line %d %s\n", ".bp\n.lf %d %s\n" };
+static const char *mpx_posttex[] = { "\n\\stopmpxshipout\n", "\n" };
+static const char *mpx_preverb1[] = {"", ".lf %d %s\n" };    /* if very first instance */
+static const char *mpx_preverb[] = { "%% line %d %s\n", ".lf %d %s\n"};  /* all other instances */
+static const char *mpx_postverb[] = { "\n", "\n" } ;
+
+@ @c
+static void mpx_mpto(MPX mpx, char *tmpname, char *mptexpre) {
+    FILE *outfile;
+    int mode      = mpx->mode;
+    char *mpname  = mpx->mpname; 
+    if (mode==mpx_tex_mode) {
+       TMPNAME_EXT(mpx->tex,".tex");
+    } else {
+       TMPNAME_EXT(mpx->tex,".i");
+    }
+    outfile  = mpx_xfopen(mpx,mpx->tex, "wb");
+    if (mode==mpx_tex_mode) {
+      FILE *fr;
+      if ((fr = fopen(mptexpre, "r"))!= NULL) {
+           size_t i;
+  	   char buf[512];
+           while ((i=fread((void *)buf, 1, 512 , fr))>0) {
+	      fwrite((void *)buf,1, i, outfile);
+           }
+ 	   mpx_fclose(mpx,fr);
+      }
+    }
+    mpx->mpfile   = mpx_xfopen(mpx,mpname, "r");
+    fprintf(outfile,"%s", mpx_predoc[mode]);
+    while (mpx_getline(mpx, mpx->mpfile) != NULL)
+        @<Do a line@>;
+    fprintf(outfile,"%s", mpx_postdoc[mode]);
+    mpx_fclose(mpx,mpx->mpfile);
+    mpx_fclose(mpx,outfile);
+    mpx->lnno = 0;
+}
+
+@ 
+@<Do a line@>=
+{
+  mpx->aa = mpx->buf;
+  while (mpx_getbta(mpx, mpx->aa)) {
+    if (*(mpx->tt) == '%') {
+      break;
+    } else if (*(mpx->tt) == '"') {
+      do {
+        if (!mpx_getbta(mpx, mpx->aa))
+          mpx_error(mpx,"string does not end");
+      } while (*(mpx->tt) != '"');
+    } else if (*(mpx->tt) == 'b') {
+      if (mpx->texcnt++ == 0)
+        fprintf(outfile,mpx_pretex1[mode], mpx->lnno, mpname);
+      else
+        fprintf(outfile,mpx_pretex[mode], mpx->lnno, mpname);
+      mpx_copy_mpto(mpx, outfile);
+      fprintf(outfile,"%s", mpx_posttex[mode]);
+    } else if (*(mpx->tt) == 'v') {
+      if (mpx->verbcnt++ == 0 && mpx->texcnt == 0)
+        fprintf(outfile,mpx_preverb1[mode], mpx->lnno, mpname);
+      else
+        fprintf(outfile,mpx_preverb[mode], mpx->lnno, mpname);
+      mpx_copy_mpto(mpx, outfile);
+      fprintf(outfile,"%s", mpx_postverb[mode]);
+    } else {
+      mpx_error(mpx,"unmatched etex");
+    }
+  }
+}
+
+@ @<Run |mpto| on the mp file@>=
+mpx_mpto(mpx, tmpname, mpxopt->mptexpre)
+
+@* DVItoMP Processing.
+
+The \.{DVItoMP} program reads binary device-independent (``\.{DVI}'')
+files that are produced by document compilers such as \TeX, and converts them
+into a symbolic form understood by \MP.  It is loosely based on the \.{DVItype}
+utility program that produces a more faithful symbolic form of a \.{DVI} file.
+
+The output file is a sequence of \MP\ picture expressions, one for every page
+in the \.{DVI} file.  It makes no difference to \.{DVItoMP} where the \.{DVI}
+file comes from, but it is intended to process the result of running \TeX\
+or \LaTeX\ on the output of the extraction process that is defined above.  
+Such a \.{DVI} file will contain one page for every \.{btex}$\ldots$\.{etex} 
+block in the original input.  Processing with \.{DVItoMP} creates a 
+corresponding sequence of \MP\ picture expressions for use as an auxiliary 
+input file.  Since \MP\ expects such files to have the extension \.{.MPX}, 
+the output of \.{DVItoMP} is sometimes called an ``\.{MPX}'' file.
+
+@ The following parameters can be changed at compile time to extend or
+reduce \.{DVItoMP}'s capacity. 
+
+TODO: dynamic reallocation
+
+@d virtual_space 1000000 /* maximum total bytes of typesetting commands for virtual fonts */
+@d max_fonts 1000 /* maximum number of distinct fonts per \.{DVI} file */
+@d max_fnums 3000 /* maximum number of fonts plus fonts local to virtual fonts */
+@d max_widths (256*max_fonts) /* maximum number of different characters among all fonts */
+@d line_length 79 /* maximum output line length (must be at least 60) */
+@d stack_size 100 /* \.{DVI} files shouldn't |push| beyond this depth */
+@d font_tolerance 0.00001
+  /* font sizes should match to within this multiple of $2^{20}$ \.{DVI} units */
+
+@ If the \.{DVI} file is badly malformed, the whole process must be aborted;
+\.{DVItoMP} will give up, after issuing an error message about the symptoms
+that were noticed.
+
+@d bad_dvi(A)       mpx_abort(mpx,"Bad DVI file: " A "!")
+@d bad_dvi_two(A,B) mpx_abort(mpx,"Bad DVI file: %s !", A, B)
+@.Bad DVI file@>
+
+@* The character set.
+
+Like all programs written with the  \.{WEB} system, \.{DVItoMP} can be
+used with any character set. It an identify transfrom internally, because
+the programming for portable input-output is easier when a fixed internal
+code is used, and because \.{DVI} files use ASCII code for file names.
+
+In the conversion from Pascal to C, the |xchr| array has been removed.
+Because some systems may still want to change the input--output character
+set, the accesses to |xchr| and |printable| are replaced by macro calls.
+
+@d printable(c) (isprint(c) && c < 128 && c!='"')
+@d xchr(A) (A)
+
+@ @c 
+static void mpx_open_mpxfile (MPX mpx) { /* prepares to write text on |mpxfile| */
+   mpx->mpxfile = mpx_xfopen (mpx,mpx->mpxname, "wb");
+}
+
+@* Device-independent file format.
+The format of \.{DVI} files is described in many places including
+\.{dvitype.web} and Volume~B of D.~E. Knuth's {\sl Computers and Typesetting}.
+This program refers to the following command codes.
+
+@d id_byte 2 /* identifies the kind of \.{DVI} files described here */
+@#
+@d set_char_0 0 /* typeset character 0 and move right */
+@d set1 128 /* typeset a character and move right */
+@d set_rule 132 /* typeset a rule and move right */
+@d put1 133 /* typeset a character */
+@d put_rule 137 /* typeset a rule */
+@d nop 138 /* no operation */
+@d bop 139 /* beginning of page */
+@d eop 140 /* ending of page */
+@d push 141 /* save the current positions */
+@d pop 142 /* restore previous positions */
+@d right1 143 /* move right */
+@d w0 147 /* move right by |w| */
+@d w1 148 /* move right and set |w| */
+@d x0 152 /* move right by |x| */
+@d x1 153 /* move right and set |x| */
+@d down1 157 /* move down */
+@d y0 161 /* move down by |y| */
+@d y1 162 /* move down and set |y| */
+@d z0 166 /* move down by |z| */
+@d z1 167 /* move down and set |z| */
+@d fnt_num_0 171 /* set current font to 0 */
+@d fnt1 235 /* set current font */
+@d xxx1 239 /* extension to \.{DVI} primitives */
+@d xxx4 242 /* potentially long extension to \.{DVI} primitives */
+@d fnt_def1 243 /* define the meaning of a font number */
+@d pre 247 /* preamble */
+@d post 248 /* postamble beginning */
+@d post_post 249 /* postamble ending */
+@d undefined_commands 250: case 251: case 252: case 253: case 254: case 255
+
+@* Input from binary files.
+
+@ The program deals with two binary file variables: |dvi_file| is the main
+input file that we are translating into symbolic form, and |tfm_file| is
+the current font metric file from which character-width information is
+being read.  It is convenient to have a throw-away variable for function
+results when reading parts of the files that are being skipped.
+
+@<Glob...@>=
+FILE * dvi_file; /* the input file */
+FILE * tfm_file; /* a font metric file */
+FILE * vf_file; /* a virtual font file */
+
+@ Prepares to read packed bytes in |dvi_file|
+@c 
+static void mpx_open_dvi_file (MPX mpx) {
+    mpx->dvi_file = fopen(mpx->dviname,"rb");
+    if (mpx->dvi_file==NULL)
+      mpx_abort(mpx,"DVI generation failed");
+}
+
+@ Prepares to read packed bytes in |tfm_file|
+@c 
+static web_boolean mpx_open_tfm_file (MPX mpx) { 
+  mpx->tfm_file = mpx_fsearch(mpx, mpx->cur_name, mpx_tfm_format);
+  if (mpx->tfm_file == NULL)
+	  mpx_abort(mpx,"Cannot find TFM %s", mpx->cur_name);
+  free (mpx->cur_name); /* We |xmalloc|'d this before we got called. */
+  return true; /* If we get here, we succeeded. */
+}
+
+@ Prepares to read packed bytes in |vf_file|. 
+It's ok if the \.{VF} file doesn't exist.
+
+@c 
+static web_boolean mpx_open_vf_file (MPX mpx) {
+  mpx->vf_file = mpx_fsearch(mpx, mpx->cur_name, mpx_vf_format);
+  if (mpx->vf_file) {
+    free (mpx->cur_name);
+    return true;
+  } 
+  return false;
+}
+
+@ If you looked carefully at the preceding code, you probably asked,
+``What is |cur_name|?'' Good question. It's a global
+variable: |cur_name| is a string variable that will be set to the
+current font metric file name before |open_tfm_file| or |open_vf_file|
+is called.
+
+@<Glob...@>=
+char *cur_name; /* external name */
+
+@ It turns out to be convenient to read four bytes at a time, when we are
+inputting from \.{TFM} files. The input goes into global variables
+|b0|, |b1|, |b2|, and |b3|, with |b0| getting the first byte and |b3|
+the fourth.
+
+@<Glob...@>=
+int b0, b1, b2, b3; /* four bytes input at once */
+
+@ The |read_tfm_word| procedure sets |b0| through |b3| to the next
+four bytes in the current \.{TFM} file.
+
+@c 
+static void mpx_read_tfm_word (MPX mpx) { 
+  mpx->b0 = getc(mpx->tfm_file); 
+  mpx->b1 = getc(mpx->tfm_file);
+  mpx->b2 = getc(mpx->tfm_file);
+  mpx->b3 = getc(mpx->tfm_file);
+}
+
+@ Input can come from from three different sources depending on the settings
+of global variables.  When |vf_reading| is true, we read from the \.{VF} file.
+Otherwise, input can either come directly from |dvi_file| or from a buffer
+|cmd_buf|.  The latter case applies whenever |buf_ptr<virtual_space|.
+
+@<Glob...@>=
+web_boolean vf_reading; /* should input come from |vf_file|? */
+unsigned char cmd_buf[(virtual_space+1)]; /* commands for virtual characters */
+unsigned int buf_ptr; /* |cmd_buf| index for the next byte */
+
+@ @<Set init...@>=
+mpx->vf_reading=false;
+mpx->buf_ptr=virtual_space;
+
+@ We shall use a set of simple functions to read the next byte or bytes from the
+current input source. There are seven possibilities, each of which is treated
+as a separate function in order to minimize the overhead for subroutine calls.
+
+@c 
+static web_integer mpx_get_byte (MPX mpx) { /* returns the next byte, unsigned */
+  unsigned char b;
+  @<Read one byte into |b|@>;
+  return b;
+}
+
+static web_integer mpx_signed_byte (MPX mpx) { /* returns the next byte, signed */ 
+  unsigned char b;
+  @<Read one byte into |b|@>;
+  return ( b<128 ? b : (b-256));
+}
+
+static web_integer mpx_get_two_bytes (MPX mpx) { /* returns the next two bytes, unsigned */
+  unsigned char a,b;
+  a=0; b=0; /* for compiler warnings */
+  @<Read two bytes into |a| and |b|@>;
+  return (a*(int)(256)+b);
+}
+
+static web_integer mpx_signed_pair (MPX mpx) { /* returns the next two bytes, signed */
+  unsigned char a,b;
+  a=0; b=0; /* for compiler warnings */
+  @<Read two bytes into |a| and |b|@>;
+  if ( a<128 ) return (a*256+b);
+  else return ((a-256)*256+b);
+}
+
+static web_integer mpx_get_three_bytes (MPX mpx) { /* returns the next three bytes, unsigned */
+  unsigned char a,b,c;
+  a=0; b=0; c=0; /* for compiler warnings */
+  @<Read three bytes into |a|, |b|, and~|c|@>;
+  return ((a*(int)(256)+b)*256+c);
+}
+
+static web_integer mpx_signed_trio (MPX mpx) { /* returns the next three bytes, signed */
+  unsigned char a,b,c;
+  a=0; b=0; c=0; /* for compiler warnings */
+  @<Read three bytes into |a|, |b|, and~|c|@>;
+  if ( a<128 ) return ((a*(int)(256)+b)*256+c);
+  else  return (((a-(int)(256))*256+b)*256+c);
+}
+
+static web_integer mpx_signed_quad (MPX mpx) { /* returns the next four bytes, signed */
+  unsigned char a,b,c,d;
+  a=0; b=0; c=0; d=0; /* for compiler warnings */
+  @<Read four bytes into |a|, |b|, |c|, and~|d|@>;
+  if ( a<128 ) return (((a*(int)(256)+b)*256+c)*256+d);
+  else return ((((a-256)*(int)(256)+b)*256+c)*256+d);
+}
+
+@ @<Read one byte into |b|@>=
+if ( mpx->vf_reading ) {
+  b = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->vf_file);
+} else if ( mpx->buf_ptr==virtual_space ) {
+  b = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->dvi_file);
+} else { 
+  b=mpx->cmd_buf[mpx->buf_ptr];
+  incr(mpx->buf_ptr);
+}
+
+@ @<Read two bytes into |a| and |b|@>=
+if ( mpx->vf_reading ) { 
+  a = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->vf_file);
+  b = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->vf_file);
+} else if ( mpx->buf_ptr==virtual_space ) { 
+  a = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->dvi_file);
+  b = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->dvi_file);
+} else if ( mpx->buf_ptr+2>mpx->n_cmds ) {
+  mpx_abort(mpx,"Error detected while interpreting a virtual font");
+@.Error detected while...@>
+} else { 
+  a=mpx->cmd_buf[mpx->buf_ptr];
+  b=mpx->cmd_buf[mpx->buf_ptr+1];
+  mpx->buf_ptr+=2;
+}
+
+@ @<Read three bytes into |a|, |b|, and~|c|@>=
+if ( mpx->vf_reading ) { 
+  a = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->vf_file);
+  b = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->vf_file);
+  c = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->vf_file);
+} else if ( mpx->buf_ptr==virtual_space ) { 
+  a = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->dvi_file);
+  b = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->dvi_file);
+  c = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->dvi_file);
+} else if ( mpx->buf_ptr+3>mpx->n_cmds ) {
+  mpx_abort(mpx,"Error detected while interpreting a virtual font");
+@.Error detected while...@>
+} else { 
+  a=mpx->cmd_buf[mpx->buf_ptr];
+  b=mpx->cmd_buf[mpx->buf_ptr+1];
+  c=mpx->cmd_buf[mpx->buf_ptr+2];
+  mpx->buf_ptr+=3;
+}
+
+@ @<Read four bytes into |a|, |b|, |c|, and~|d|@>=
+if ( mpx->vf_reading ) { 
+  a = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->vf_file);
+  b = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->vf_file);
+  c = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->vf_file);
+  d = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->vf_file);
+} else if ( mpx->buf_ptr==virtual_space ) { 
+  a = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->dvi_file);
+  b = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->dvi_file);
+  c = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->dvi_file);
+  d = (unsigned char)getc(mpx->dvi_file);
+} else if ( mpx->buf_ptr+4>mpx->n_cmds ) {
+  mpx_abort(mpx,"Error detected while interpreting a virtual font");
+@.Error detected while...@>
+} else { 
+  a=mpx->cmd_buf[mpx->buf_ptr];
+  b=mpx->cmd_buf[mpx->buf_ptr+1];
+  c=mpx->cmd_buf[mpx->buf_ptr+2];
+  d=mpx->cmd_buf[mpx->buf_ptr+3];
+  mpx->buf_ptr+=4;
+}
+
+@* Data structures for fonts.
+
+\.{DVI} file format does not include information about character widths, since
+that would tend to make the files a lot longer. But a program that reads
+a \.{DVI} file is supposed to know the widths of the characters that appear
+in \\{set\_char} commands. Therefore \.{DVItoMP} looks at the font metric
+(\.{TFM}) files for the fonts that are involved.
+@.TFM {\rm files}@>
+
+@ For purposes of this program, the only thing we need to know about a
+given character |c| in a non-virtual font |f| is the width.  For the font as
+a whole, all we need is the symbolic name to use in the \.{MPX} file.
+
+This information appears implicitly in the following data
+structures. The current number of fonts defined is |nf|. Each such font has
+an internal number |f|, where |0<=f<nf|.  There is also an external number
+that identifies the font in the \.{DVI} file.  The correspondence is
+maintained in arrays |font_num| and |internal_num| so that |font_num[i]|
+is the external number for |f=internal_num[i]|.
+The external name of this font is the string that occupies |font_name[f]|.
+The legal characters run from |font_bc[f]| to |font_ec[f]|, inclusive.
+The \.{TFM} file can specify that some of these are invalid, but this doesn't
+concern \.{DVItoMP} because it does not do extensive error checking.
+The width of character~|c| in font~|f| is given by
+|char_width(f,c)=width[info_base[f]+c]|, and |info_ptr| is the
+first unused position of the |width| array.
+
+If font~|f| is a virtual font, there is a list of \.{DVI} commands for each
+character.  These occupy consecutive positions in the |cmd_buf| array with
+the commands for character~|c| starting at
+|start_cmd(f,c)=cmd_ptr[info_base[f]+c]| and ending just before
+|start_cmd(f,c+1)|.  Font numbers used when interpreting these \.{DVI}
+commands occupy positions |fbase[f]| through |ftop[f]-1| in the |font_num|
+table and the |internal_num| array gives the corresponding internal font
+numbers.  If such an internal font number~|i| does not correspond to
+some font occuring in the \.{DVI} file, then |font_num[i]| has not been
+assigned a meaningful value; this is indicated by |local_only[i]=true|.
+
+If font~|f| is not virtual, then |fbase[f]=0| and |ftop[f]=0|.  The |start_cmd|
+values are ignored in this case.
+
+@d char_width(A,B) mpx->width[mpx->info_base[(A)]+(B)]
+@d start_cmd(A,B) mpx->cmd_ptr[mpx->info_base[(A)]+(B)]
+
+@<Glob...@>=
+web_integer font_num[(max_fnums+1)]; /* external font numbers */
+web_integer internal_num[(max_fnums+1)]; /* internal font numbers */
+web_boolean local_only[(max_fnums+1)]; /* |font_num| meaningless? */
+char *font_name[(max_fonts+1)]; /* starting positions of external font names */
+double font_scaled_size[(max_fonts+1)]; /* scale factors over $2^{20}$ */
+double font_design_size[(max_fonts+1)]; /* design sizes over $2^{20}$ */
+web_integer font_check_sum[(max_fonts+1)];  /* check sum from the |font_def| */
+web_integer font_bc[(max_fonts+1)]; /* beginning characters in fonts */
+web_integer font_ec[(max_fonts+1)]; /* ending characters in fonts */
+web_integer info_base[(max_fonts+1)]; /* index into |width| and |cmd_ptr| tables */
+web_integer width[(max_widths+1)];
+  /* character widths, in units $2^{-20}$ of design size */
+web_integer fbase[(max_fonts+1)]; /* index into |font_num| for local fonts */
+web_integer ftop[(max_fonts+1)];  /* |font_num| index where local fonts stop */
+web_integer cmd_ptr[(max_widths+1)]; /* starting positions in |cmd_buf| */
+unsigned int nfonts; /* the number of known fonts */
+unsigned int vf_ptr;  /* next |font_num| entry for virtual font font tables */
+unsigned int info_ptr; /* allocation pointer for |width| and |cmd_ptr| tables */
+unsigned int n_cmds; /* number of occupied cells in |cmd_buf| */
+unsigned int cur_fbase, cur_ftop;
+  /* currently applicable part of the |font_num| table */
+
+@ @<Set init...@>=
+mpx->nfonts=0; mpx->info_ptr=0; mpx->font_name[0]=0;
+mpx->vf_ptr=max_fnums;
+mpx->cur_fbase=0; mpx->cur_ftop=0;
+
+@ Printing the name of a given font is easy except that a procedure |print_char|
+is needed to actually send an |ASCII_code| to the \.{MPX} file.
+
+@c @<Declare subroutines for printing strings@>@;
+static void mpx_print_font (MPX mpx, web_integer f) { /* |f| is an internal font number */
+  if ( (f<0)||(f>=(int)mpx->nfonts) ) {
+    bad_dvi("Undefined font");
+  } else { 
+    char *s = mpx->font_name[f];
+    while (*s) {
+      mpx_print_char(mpx,(unsigned char)*s);
+      s++;
+    }
+  }
+}
+
+@ Sometimes a font name is needed as part of an error message.
+
+@d font_warn(A,B)  mpx_warn (mpx,"%s %s",A,mpx->font_name[(B)])
+@d font_error(A,B) mpx_error(mpx,"%s %s",A,mpx->font_name[(B)])
+@d font_abort(A,B) mpx_abort(mpx,"%s %s",A,mpx->font_name[(B)])
+
+
+@ When we encounter a font definition, we save the name, checksum, and size
+information, but we don't actually read the \.{TFM} or \.{VF} file until we
+are about to use the font.  If a matching font is not already defined, we then
+allocate a new internal font number.
+
+The following subroutine does the necessary things when a \\{fnt\_def} command
+is encountered in the \.{DVI} file or in a \.{VF} file.  It assumes that the
+first argument has already been parsed and is given by the parameter~|e|.
+
+@c @<Declare a function called |match_font|@>@;
+static void mpx_define_font (MPX mpx, web_integer e) { /* |e| is an external font number */
+  unsigned i; /* index into |font_num| and |internal_num| */
+  web_integer n; /* length of the font name and area */
+  web_integer k; /* general purpose loop counter */
+  web_integer x;  /* a temporary value for scaled size computation */
+  if ( mpx->nfonts==max_fonts ) 
+    mpx_abort(mpx,"DVItoMP capacity exceeded (max fonts=%d)!", max_fonts);
+@.DVItoMP capacity exceeded...@>
+  @<Allocate an index |i| into the |font_num| and |internal_num| tables@>;
+  @<Read the font parameters into position for font |nf|@>;
+  mpx->internal_num[i]=mpx_match_font(mpx, mpx->nfonts,true);
+  if ( mpx->internal_num[i]==(int)mpx->nfonts ) {
+    mpx->info_base[mpx->nfonts]=max_widths; /* indicate that the info isn't loaded yet */
+    mpx->local_only[mpx->nfonts]=mpx->vf_reading; incr(mpx->nfonts);
+  }
+}
+
+@ @<Allocate an index |i| into the |font_num| and |internal_num| tables@>=
+if ( mpx->vf_ptr==mpx->nfonts ) 
+  mpx_abort(mpx,"DVItoMP capacity exceeded (max font numbers=%d)",  max_fnums);
+@.DVItoMP capacity exceeded...@>
+if ( mpx->vf_reading ) { 
+  mpx->font_num[mpx->nfonts]=0; i=mpx->vf_ptr; decr(mpx->vf_ptr);
+} else {
+  i=mpx->nfonts;
+}
+mpx->font_num[i]=e
+
+@ @<Read the font parameters into position for font |nf|@>=
+mpx->font_check_sum[mpx->nfonts]=mpx_signed_quad(mpx);
+@<Read |font_scaled_size[nf]| and |font_design_size[nf]|@>;
+n=mpx_get_byte(mpx);  /* that is the area */
+n=n+mpx_get_byte(mpx);
+mpx->font_name[mpx->nfonts]=xmalloc((size_t)(n+1),1);
+for (k=0;k<n;k++)
+   mpx->font_name[mpx->nfonts][k]=mpx_get_byte(mpx);
+mpx->font_name[mpx->nfonts][k]=0
+
+@ The scaled size and design size are stored in \.{DVI} units divided by $2^{20}$.
+The units for scaled size are a little different if we are reading a virtual
+font, but this will be corrected when the scaled size is used.  The scaled size
+also needs to be truncated to at most 23 significant bits in order to make
+the character width calculation match what \TeX\ does.
+
+@<Read |font_scaled_size[nf]| and |font_design_size[nf]|@>=
+x=mpx_signed_quad(mpx);
+k=1;
+while ( mpx->x>040000000 ) { 
+  x= x / 2; k=k+k;
+}
+mpx->font_scaled_size[mpx->nfonts]=x*k/1048576.0;
+if ( mpx->vf_reading )
+  mpx->font_design_size[mpx->nfonts]=mpx_signed_quad(mpx)*mpx->dvi_per_fix/1048576.0;
+else mpx->font_design_size[mpx->nfonts]=mpx_signed_quad(mpx)/1048576.0;
+
+@ @<Glob...@>=
+double dvi_per_fix; /* converts points scaled $2^{20}$ to \.{DVI} units */
+
+@ The |match_font| function tries to find a match for the font with internal
+number~|ff|, returning |nf| or the number of the matching font.  If
+|exact=true|, the name and scaled size should match.  Otherwise the scaled
+size need not match but the font found must be already loaded, not just
+defined.
+
+@<Declare a function called |match_font|@>=
+static web_integer mpx_match_font (MPX mpx, unsigned ff, web_boolean  exact) {
+  unsigned f; /* font number being tested */
+  for (f=0; f<mpx->nfonts ; f++) {
+    if ( f!=ff ) {
+      @<Compare the names of fonts |f| and |ff|; |continue| if they differ@>;
+      if ( exact ) {
+        if ( fabs(mpx->font_scaled_size[f]-mpx->font_scaled_size[ff])<= font_tolerance ) {
+          if ( ! mpx->vf_reading ) {
+            if ( mpx->local_only[f] ) {
+              mpx->font_num[f]=mpx->font_num[ff]; mpx->local_only[f]=false;
+            } else if ( mpx->font_num[f]!=mpx->font_num[ff] ) {
+              continue;
+            }
+          }
+          break;
+        }
+      } else if ( mpx->info_base[f]!=max_widths ) {
+        break;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+  if ( f<mpx->nfonts ) {
+    @<Make sure fonts |f| and |ff| have matching design sizes and checksums@>;
+  }
+  return (web_integer)f;
+}
+
+@ @<Compare the names of fonts |f| and |ff|; |continue| if they differ@>=
+if (strcmp(mpx->font_name[f],mpx->font_name[ff]))
+   continue
+
+@ @<Make sure fonts |f| and |ff| have matching design sizes and checksums@>=
+if ( fabs(mpx->font_design_size[f]-mpx->font_design_size[ff]) > font_tolerance ) {
+  font_error("Inconsistent design sizes given for ",ff);
+@.Inconsistent design sizes@>
+} else if ( mpx->font_check_sum[f]!=mpx->font_check_sum[ff] ) {
+  font_warn("Checksum mismatch for ", ff);
+@.Checksum mismatch@>
+}
+
+@* Reading ordinary fonts.
+An auxiliary array |in_width| is used to hold the widths as they are
+input. The global variable |tfm_check_sum| is set to the check sum that
+appears in the current \.{TFM} file.
+
+@<Glob...@>=
+web_integer in_width[256]; /* \.{TFM} width data in \.{DVI} units */
+web_integer tfm_check_sum; /* check sum found in |tfm_file| */
+
+@ Here is a procedure that absorbs the necessary information from a
+\.{TFM} file, assuming that the file has just been successfully reset
+so that we are ready to read its first byte. (A complete description of
+\.{TFM} file format appears in the documentation of \.{TFtoPL} and will
+not be repeated here.) The procedure does not check the \.{TFM} file
+for validity, nor does it give explicit information about what is
+wrong with a \.{TFM} file that proves to be invalid. The procedure simply
+aborts the program if it detects anything amiss in the \.{TFM} data.
+
+@c 
+static void mpx_in_TFM (MPX mpx,web_integer f) {
+  /* input \.{TFM} data for font |f| or abort */
+  web_integer k; /* index for loops */
+  int lh; /* length of the header data, in four-byte words */
+  int nw; /* number of words in the width table */
+  unsigned wp; /* new value of |info_ptr| after successful input */
+  @<Read past the header data; |abort| if there is a problem@>;
+  @<Store character-width indices at the end of the |width| table@>;
+  @<Read the width values into the |in_width| table@>;
+  @<Move the widths from |in_width| to |width|@>;
+  mpx->fbase[f]=0; mpx->ftop[f]=0;
+  mpx->info_ptr=wp;
+  return;
+}
+
+@ @<Read past the header...@>=
+mpx_read_tfm_word(mpx); lh=mpx->b2*(int)(256)+mpx->b3;
+mpx_read_tfm_word(mpx); 
+mpx->font_bc[f]=mpx->b0*(int)(256)+mpx->b1; 
+mpx->font_ec[f]=mpx->b2*(int)(256)+mpx->b3;
+if ( mpx->font_ec[f]<mpx->font_bc[f] ) mpx->font_bc[f]=mpx->font_ec[f]+1;
+if ( mpx->info_ptr+mpx->font_ec[f]-mpx->font_bc[f]+1>max_widths )
+  mpx_abort(mpx,"DVItoMP capacity exceeded (width table size=%d)!",max_widths);
+@.DVItoMP capacity exceeded...@>
+wp=mpx->info_ptr+mpx->font_ec[f]-mpx->font_bc[f]+1;
+mpx_read_tfm_word(mpx); nw=mpx->b0*256+mpx->b1;
+if ( (nw==0)||(nw>256) ) 
+  font_abort("Bad TFM file for ",f);
+@.Bad TFM file@>
+for (k=1;k<=3+lh;k++) { 
+  if ( feof(mpx->tfm_file) )
+    font_abort("Bad TFM file for ",f);
+@.Bad TFM file@>
+  mpx_read_tfm_word(mpx);
+  if ( k==4 ) {
+    if ( mpx->b0<128 ) 
+      mpx->tfm_check_sum=((mpx->b0*(int)(256)+mpx->b1)*256+mpx->b2)*256+mpx->b3;
+    else 
+      mpx->tfm_check_sum=(((mpx->b0-256)*(int)(256)+mpx->b1)*256+mpx->b2)*256+mpx->b3;
+  }
+  if ( k==5 ) {
+    if (mpx->mode == mpx_troff_mode) {
+      mpx->font_design_size[f]=(((mpx->b0*(int)(256)+mpx->b1)*256+mpx->b2)*256+mpx->b3)/(65536.0*16);
+    }
+  }
+}
+
+@ @<Store character-width indices...@>=
+if ( wp>0 ) {
+  for (k=(int)mpx->info_ptr;k<=(int)wp-1;k++ ) {
+    mpx_read_tfm_word(mpx);
+    if ( mpx->b0>nw ) 
+      font_abort("Bad TFM file for ",f);
+@.Bad TFM file@>
+    mpx->width[k]=mpx->b0;
+  }
+}
+
+@ No fancy width calculation is needed here because \.{DVItoMP} stores
+widths in their raw form as multiples of the design size scaled by $2^{20}$.
+The |font_scaled_size| entries have been computed so that the final width
+compution can be done in floating point if enough precision is available.
+
+@<Read the width values into the |in_width| table@>=
+for (k=0;k<=nw-1;k++) { 
+  mpx_read_tfm_word(mpx);
+  if ( mpx->b0>127 ) mpx->b0=mpx->b0-256;
+  mpx->in_width[k]=((mpx->b0*0400+mpx->b1)*0400+mpx->b2)*0400+mpx->b3;
+}
+
+@ The width compution uses a scale factor |dvi_scale| that will be introduced
+later.  It is equal to one when not typesetting a character from a virtual
+font.  In that case, the following expressions do the width computation that is
+so important in \.{DVItype}.  It is less important here because it is impractical
+to guarantee precise character positioning in \MP\ output.  Nevertheless, the
+width compution will be precise if reals have at least 46-bit mantissas and
+|round(x-.5)| is equivalent to $\lfloor x\rfloor$.  It may be a good idea to
+modify this computation if these conditions are not met.
+@^system dependencies@>
+
+@<Width of character |c| in font |f|@>=
+floor(mpx->dvi_scale*mpx->font_scaled_size[f]*char_width(f,c))
+
+@ @<Width of character |p| in font |cur_font|@>=
+floor(mpx->dvi_scale*mpx->font_scaled_size[cur_font]*char_width(cur_font,p))
+
+@ @<Move the widths from |in_width| to |width|@>=
+if ( mpx->in_width[0]!=0 )
+  font_abort("Bad TFM file for ",f);  /* the first width should be zero */
+@.Bad TFM file@>
+mpx->info_base[f]=(int)(mpx->info_ptr-mpx->font_bc[f]);
+if ( wp>0 ) {
+  for (k=(int)mpx->info_ptr;k<=(int)wp-1;k++) {
+    mpx->width[k]=mpx->in_width[mpx->width[k]];
+  }
+}
+
+
+@* Reading virtual fonts.
+
+The |in_VF| procedure absorbs the necessary information from a \.{VF} file that
+has just been reset so that we are ready to read the first byte.  (A complete
+description of \.{VF} file format appears in the documention of \.{VFtoVP}).
+Like |in_TFM|, this procedure simply aborts the program if it detects anything
+wrong with the \.{VF} file.
+
+@c 
+@<Declare a function called |first_par|@>@;
+static void mpx_in_VF (MPX mpx, web_integer f) {
+  /* read \.{VF} data for font |f| or abort */
+  web_integer p; /* a byte from the \.{VF} file */
+  boolean was_vf_reading; /* old value of |vf_reading| */
+  web_integer c; /* the current character code */
+  web_integer limit; /* space limitations force character codes to be less than this */
+  web_integer w; /* a \.{TFM} width being read */
+  was_vf_reading=mpx->vf_reading; mpx->vf_reading=true;
+  @<Start reading the preamble from a \.{VF} file@>;@/
+  @<Initialize the data structures for the virtual font@>;@/
+  p=mpx_get_byte(mpx);
+  while ( p>=fnt_def1 ) { 
+    if ( p>fnt_def1+3 ) 
+      font_abort("Bad VF file for ",f);
+    mpx_define_font(mpx, mpx_first_par(mpx, (unsigned int)p));
+    p=mpx_get_byte(mpx);
+  }
+  while ( p<=242 ) { 
+    if ( feof(mpx->vf_file) ) 
+      font_abort("Bad VF file for ",f);
+    @<Read the packet length, character code, and \.{TFM} width@>;
+    @<Store the character packet in |cmd_buf|@>;
+    p=mpx_get_byte(mpx);
+  }
+  if ( p==post ) { 
+    @<Finish setting up the data structures for the new virtual font@>;
+    mpx->vf_reading=was_vf_reading;
+    return;
+  }
+}
+
+@ @<Start reading the preamble from a \.{VF} file@>=
+p=mpx_get_byte(mpx);
+if ( p!=pre ) 
+  font_abort("Bad VF file for ",f);
+p=mpx_get_byte(mpx); /* fetch the identification byte */
+if ( p!=202 )
+  font_abort("Bad VF file for ",f);
+p=mpx_get_byte(mpx); /* fetch the length of the introductory comment */
+while ( p-->0 ) 
+  (void)mpx_get_byte(mpx);
+mpx->tfm_check_sum=mpx_signed_quad(mpx);
+(void)mpx_signed_quad(mpx); /* skip over the design size */
+
+@ @<Initialize the data structures for the virtual font@>=
+mpx->ftop[f]=(web_integer)mpx->vf_ptr;
+if ( mpx->vf_ptr==mpx->nfonts ) 
+  mpx_abort(mpx,"DVItoMP capacity exceeded (max font numbers=%d)", max_fnums);
+@.DVItoMP capacity exceeded...@>
+decr(mpx->vf_ptr);
+mpx->info_base[f]=(web_integer)mpx->info_ptr;
+limit=max_widths-mpx->info_base[f];@/
+mpx->font_bc[f]=limit; mpx->font_ec[f]=0
+
+@ @<Read the packet length, character code, and \.{TFM} width@>=
+if ( p==242 ) { 
+  p=mpx_signed_quad(mpx); c=mpx_signed_quad(mpx); w=mpx_signed_quad(mpx);
+  if ( c<0 ) 
+    font_abort("Bad VF file for ",f);
+} else { 
+  c=mpx_get_byte(mpx); w=mpx_get_three_bytes(mpx);
+}
+if ( c>=limit )
+  mpx_abort(mpx,"DVItoMP capacity exceeded (max widths=%d)", max_widths);
+@.DVItoMP capacity exceeded...@>
+if ( c<mpx->font_bc[f] ) mpx->font_bc[f]=c;
+if ( c>mpx->font_ec[f] ) mpx->font_ec[f]=c;
+char_width(f,c)=w
+
+@ @<Store the character packet in |cmd_buf|@>=
+if ( mpx->n_cmds+p>=virtual_space )
+  mpx_abort(mpx,"DVItoMP capacity exceeded (virtual font space=%d)",virtual_space);
+@.DVItoMP capacity exceeded...@>
+start_cmd(f,c)=(web_integer)mpx->n_cmds;
+while ( p>0 ) { 
+  mpx->cmd_buf[mpx->n_cmds]=(unsigned char)mpx_get_byte(mpx);
+  incr(mpx->n_cmds); decr(p);
+}
+mpx->cmd_buf[mpx->n_cmds]=eop; /* add the end-of-packet marker */
+incr(mpx->n_cmds)
+
+@ There are unused |width| and |cmd_ptr| entries if |font_bc[f]>0| but it isn't
+worthwhile to slide everything down just to save a little space.
+
+@<Finish setting up the data structures for the new virtual font@>=
+mpx->fbase[f]=(web_integer)(mpx->vf_ptr+1);
+mpx->info_ptr=(unsigned int)(mpx->info_base[f]+mpx->font_ec[f]+1)
+
+
+@* Loading fonts.
+
+The character width information for a font is loaded when the font is selected
+for the first time.  This information might already be loaded if the font has
+already been used at a different scale factor.  Otherwise, we look for a \.{VF}
+file, or failing that, a \.{TFM} file.  All this is done by the |select_font|
+function that takes an external font number~|e| and returns the corresponding
+internal font number with the width information loaded.
+
+@c 
+static web_integer mpx_select_font (MPX mpx, web_integer e) {
+  int f; /* the internal font number */
+  int ff; /* internal font number for an existing version */
+  web_integer k; /* general purpose loop counter */
+  @<Set |f| to the internal font number that corresponds to |e|,
+    or |abort| if there is none@>;
+  if ( mpx->info_base[f]==max_widths ) {
+    ff=mpx_match_font(mpx, (unsigned)f,false);
+    if ( ff<(int)mpx->nfonts ) {
+      @<Make font |f| refer to the width information from font |ff|@>;
+    } else { 
+      @<Move the \.{VF} file name into the |cur_name| string@>;
+      if ( mpx_open_vf_file(mpx) )  {
+        mpx_in_VF(mpx, f);
+      } else { 
+        if ( ! mpx_open_tfm_file(mpx) )
+          font_abort("No TFM file found for ",f);
+@.no TFM file found@>
+        mpx_in_TFM(mpx, f);
+      }
+      @<Make sure the checksum in the font file matches the one given in the
+        |font_def| for font |f|@>;
+    }
+    @<Do any other initialization required for the new font |f|@>;
+  }
+  return f;
+}
+
+@ @<Set |f| to the internal font number that corresponds to |e|,...@>=
+if ( mpx->cur_ftop<=mpx->nfonts ) 
+  mpx->cur_ftop=mpx->nfonts;
+mpx->font_num[mpx->cur_ftop]=e;
+k=(web_integer)mpx->cur_fbase;
+while ((mpx->font_num[k]!=e)|| mpx->local_only[k] ) incr(k);
+if ( k==(int)mpx->cur_ftop ) 
+  mpx_abort(mpx,"Undefined font selected");
+f=mpx->internal_num[k]
+
+@ @<Make font |f| refer to the width information from font |ff|@>=
+{ 
+  mpx->font_bc[f]=mpx->font_bc[ff];
+  mpx->font_ec[f]=mpx->font_ec[ff];
+  mpx->info_base[f]=mpx->info_base[ff];
+  mpx->fbase[f]=mpx->fbase[ff];
+  mpx->ftop[f]=mpx->ftop[ff];
+}
+
+@ The string |cur_name| is supposed to be set to the external name of the
+\.{VF} file for the current font. 
+@^system dependencies@>
+
+@<Move the \.{VF} file name into the |cur_name| string@>=
+mpx->cur_name = xstrdup (mpx->font_name[f])
+
+@ @<Make sure the checksum in the font file matches the one given in the...@>=
+{ 
+  if ( (mpx->font_check_sum[f]!=0)&&(mpx->tfm_check_sum!=0)&&@|
+       (mpx->font_check_sum[f]!=mpx->tfm_check_sum) ) {
+    font_warn("Checksum mismatch for ",f);
+@.Checksum mismatch@>
+  }
+}
+
+@* Low level output routines.
+
+One of the basic output operations is to write a \MP\ string expression for
+a sequence of characters to be typeset.  The main difficulties are that such
+strings can contain arbitrary eight-bit bytes and there is no fixed limit on
+the length of the string that needs to be produced.  In extreme cases this
+can lead to expressions such as
+$$\vcenter{
+    \hbox{\.{char7\&char15\&char31\&"?FWayzz"}}
+    \hbox{\.{\&"zzaF"\&char15\&char3\&char31}}
+    \hbox{\.{\&"Nxzzzzzzzwvtsqo"}}}
+$$
+
+@ A global variable |state| keeps track of the output process.
+When |state=normal| we have begun a quoted string and the next character
+should be a printable character or a closing quote.  When |state=special|
+the last thing printed was a ``\.{char}'' construction or a closing quote
+and an ampersand should come next.  The starting condition |state=initial|
+is a lot like |state=special|, except no ampersand is required.
+
+@d special 0 /* the |state| after printing a ``\.{char}'' expression */
+@d normal 1 /* the |state| value in a quoted string */
+@d initial 2 /* initial |state| */
+
+@<Glob...@>=
+int state; /* controls the process of printing a string */
+int print_col; /* there are at most this many characters on the current line */
+
+@ @<Set initial values@>=
+mpx->state = initial;
+mpx->print_col = 0;		/* there are at most this many characters on the current line */
+
+@ To print a string on the \.{MPX} file, initialize |print_col|, ensure that
+|state=initial|, and pass the characters one-at-a-time to |print_char|.
+
+@<Declare subroutines for printing strings@>=
+static void mpx_print_char (MPX mpx, unsigned char c) {
+  web_integer l; /* number of characters to print |c| or the \.{char} expression */  
+  if ( printable(c) ) l=1;
+  else if ( c<10 ) l=5;
+  else if ( c<100 ) l=6;
+  else l=7;
+  if ( mpx->print_col+l>line_length-2 ) { 
+    if ( mpx->state==normal ) { 
+      fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,"\""); mpx->state=special;
+    }
+    fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,"\n");
+    mpx->print_col=0;
+  }
+  @<Print |c| and update |state| and |print_col|@>;
+}
+
+@ @<Print |c| and update |state| and |print_col|@>=
+if ( mpx->state==normal ) {
+  if ( printable(c) ) {
+    fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,"%c",xchr(c));
+  } else { 
+    fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,"\"&char%d",c);
+    mpx->print_col +=2;
+  }
+} else { 
+  if ( mpx->state==special ) { 
+    fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,"&");
+    incr(mpx->print_col);
+  }
+  if ( printable(c) ) { 
+    fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,"\"%c",xchr(c)); 
+    incr(mpx->print_col);
+  } else { 
+    fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,"char%d",c);
+  }
+}
+mpx->print_col += l;
+if ( printable(c) ) 
+  mpx->state=normal; 
+else 
+  mpx->state=special
+
+@ The |end_char_string| procedure gets the string ended properly and ensures
+that there is room for |l| more characters on the output line.
+
+@<Declare subroutines for printing strings@>=
+static void mpx_end_char_string (MPX mpx,web_integer l) { 
+  while ( mpx->state>special ){ 
+    fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,"\"");
+    incr(mpx->print_col);
+    decr(mpx->state);
+  }
+  if ( mpx->print_col+l>line_length ) { 
+    fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,"\n "); mpx->print_col=0;
+  }
+  mpx->state=initial; /* get ready to print the next string */
+}
+
+@ Since |end_char_string| resets |state:=initial|, all we have to do is set
+|state:=initial| once at the beginning.
+
+@<Set init...@>=
+mpx->state=initial;
+
+@ Characters and rules are positioned according to global variables |h| and~|v|
+as will be explained later.  We also need scale factors that convert quantities
+to the right units when they are printed in the \.{MPX} file.
+
+Even though all variable names in the \MP\ output are made local via \.{save}
+commands, it is still desirable to preceed them with underscores.  This makes
+the output more likely to work when used in a macro definition, since the
+generated variables names must not collide with formal parameters in such
+cases.
+
+@<Glob...@>=
+web_integer h;
+web_integer v; /* the current position in \.{DVI} units */
+double conv; /* converts \.{DVI} units to \MP\ points */
+double mag; /* magnification factor times 1000 */
+
+@ @c @<Declare a procedure called |finish_last_char|@>@;
+static void mpx_do_set_char (MPX mpx,web_integer f, web_integer c) {
+  if ( (c<mpx->font_bc[f])||(c>mpx->font_ec[f]) )
+    mpx_abort(mpx,"attempt to typeset invalid character %d",c);
+@.attempt to typeset...@>
+  if ((mpx->h!=mpx->str_h2)||(mpx->v!=mpx->str_v)||
+      (f!=mpx->str_f)||(mpx->dvi_scale!=mpx->str_scale) ) {
+    if ( mpx->str_f>=0 ) {
+      mpx_finish_last_char(mpx);
+    } else if ( ! mpx->fonts_used ) {
+      @<Prepare to output the first character on a page@>;
+    }
+    if ( ! mpx->font_used[f] )
+      @<Prepare to use font |f| for the first time on a page@>;
+    fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,"_s("); mpx->print_col=3;@/
+    mpx->str_scale=mpx->dvi_scale; mpx->str_f=f; 
+    mpx->str_v=mpx->v; mpx->str_h1=mpx->h;
+  }
+  mpx_print_char(mpx, (unsigned char)c);
+  mpx->str_h2=(web_integer)(mpx->h+@<Width of character |c| in font |f|@>);
+}
+
+@ @<Glob...@>=
+boolean font_used[(max_fonts+1)]; /* has this font been used on this page? */
+boolean fonts_used; /* has any font been used on this page? */
+boolean rules_used; /* has any rules been set on this page? */
+web_integer str_h1;
+web_integer str_v; /* starting position for current output string */
+web_integer str_h2; /* where the current output string ends */
+web_integer str_f; /* internal font number for the current output string */
+double str_scale; /* value of |dvi_scale| for the current output string */
+
+
+@ Before using any fonts we need to define a MetaPost macro for
+typesetting character strings. The |font_used| array is not
+initialized until it is actually time to output a character.
+
+@<Declarations@>=
+static void mpx_prepare_font_use(MPX mpx);
+
+@ @c
+static void mpx_prepare_font_use(MPX mpx) {
+  unsigned k;
+  for (k=0; k<mpx->nfonts;k++ )
+    mpx->font_used[k]=false;
+  mpx->fonts_used=true;
+  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,"string _n[];\n");
+  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,"vardef _s(expr _t,_f,_m,_x,_y)(text _c)=\n");
+  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,
+          "  addto _p also _t infont _f scaled _m shifted (_x,_y) _c; enddef;\n");
+}
+
+@ @<Prepare to output the first character on a page@>=
+mpx_prepare_font_use(mpx)
+
+
+@ @<Do any other initialization required for the new font |f|@>=
+mpx->font_used[f]=false;
+
+@ Do what is necessary when the font with internal number f is used for the
+first time on a page.
+
+@<Declarations@>=
+static void mpx_first_use(MPX mpx, int f) ;
+
+@ @c 
+static void mpx_first_use(MPX mpx, int f) {
+  mpx->font_used[f]=true;
+  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,"_n%d=",f);
+  mpx->print_col=6;
+  mpx_print_font(mpx, f);
+  mpx_end_char_string(mpx, 1);
+  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,";\n");
+}
+
+@ @<Prepare to use font |f| for the first time on a page@>=
+mpx_first_use(mpx,f);
+
+@ We maintain the invariant that |str_f=-1| when there is no output string
+under construction.
+
+@<Declare a procedure called |finish_last_char|@>=
+static void mpx_finish_last_char (MPX mpx) {
+  double m,x,y;
+  /* font scale factor and \MP\ coordinates of reference point */
+  if ( mpx->str_f>=0 ) {
+    if (mpx->mode==mpx_tex_mode) {
+      m=mpx->str_scale*mpx->font_scaled_size[mpx->str_f]*
+         mpx->mag/mpx->font_design_size[mpx->str_f];
+      x=mpx->conv*mpx->str_h1; 
+      y=mpx->conv*(-mpx->str_v);
+      if ( (fabs(x)>=4096.0)||(fabs(y)>=4096.0)||(m>=4096.0)||(m<0) ) { 
+        mpx_warn(mpx,"text is out of range");
+        mpx_end_char_string(mpx, 60);
+      } else {
+        mpx_end_char_string(mpx, 40);
+      }
+      fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,",_n%d,%1.5f,%1.4f,%1.4f,",mpx->str_f,m,x,y);
+      @<Print a \.{withcolor} specifier if appropriate@>@/
+      fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,");\n");
+    } else {
+      m = mpx->str_size / mpx->font_design_size[mpx->str_f];
+      x = mpx->dmp_str_h1 * mpx->unit;
+      y = YCORR - mpx->dmp_str_v * mpx->unit;
+      if (fabs(x) >= 4096.0 || fabs(y) >= 4096.0 || m >= 4096.0 || m < 0) {
+        mpx_warn(mpx,"text out of range ignored");
+        mpx_end_char_string(mpx,67);
+      } else {
+        mpx_end_char_string(mpx,47);
+      }
+      fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, "), _n%d", mpx->str_f);
+      fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, ",%.5f,%.4f,%.4f)", (m*1.00375), (x/100.0), y);
+      mpx_slant_and_ht(mpx);
+      fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, ";\n");
+    }
+    mpx->str_f=-1;
+  }
+}
+
+@ Setting rules is fairly simple.
+
+@c 
+static void mpx_do_set_rule (MPX mpx,web_integer ht, web_integer wd) {
+  double xx1,yy1,xx2,yy2,ww;
+  /* \MP\ coordinates of lower-left and upper-right corners */
+  if ( wd==1 ) {
+    @<Handle a special rule that determines the box size@>
+  } else if ( (ht>0)||(wd>0) ) { 
+    if ( mpx->str_f>=0 )
+      mpx_finish_last_char(mpx);
+    if ( ! mpx->rules_used ) {
+      mpx->rules_used=true;
+      fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,
+             "interim linecap:=0;\n"
+             "vardef _r(expr _a,_w)(text _t) =\n"
+             "  addto _p doublepath _a withpen pencircle scaled _w _t enddef;");
+    }
+    @<Make |(xx1,yy1)| and |(xx2,yy2)| then ends of the desired penstroke
+      and |ww| the desired stroke width@>;
+    if ( (fabs(xx1)>=4096.0)||(fabs(yy1)>=4096.0)||@|
+        (fabs(xx2)>=4096.0)||(fabs(yy2)>=4096.0)||(ww>=4096.0) )
+      mpx_warn(mpx,"hrule or vrule is out of range");
+    fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,"_r((%1.4f,%1.4f)..(%1.4f,%1.4f), %1.4f,",xx1,yy1,xx2,yy2,ww);
+    @<Print a \.{withcolor} specifier if appropriate@>@/
+    fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,");\n");
+  }
+}
+
+@ @<Make |(xx1,yy1)| and |(xx2,yy2)| then ends of the desired penstroke...@>=
+xx1=mpx->conv*mpx->h;
+yy1=mpx->conv*(-mpx->v);
+if ( wd>ht ){ 
+  xx2=xx1+mpx->conv*wd;
+  ww=mpx->conv*ht;
+  yy1=yy1+0.5*ww;
+  yy2=yy1;
+} else { 
+  yy2=yy1+mpx->conv*ht;
+  ww=mpx->conv*wd;
+  xx1=xx1+0.5*ww;
+  xx2=xx1;
+}
+
+@ Rules of width one dvi unit are not typeset since \.{MPtoTeX} adds an
+extraneous rule of this width in order to allow \.{DVItoMP} to deduce the
+dimensions of the boxes it ships out.  The box width is the left edge of the
+last such rule; the height and depth are at the top and bottom of the rule.
+There should be only one special rule per picture but there could be more if
+the user tries to typeset his own one-dvi-unit rules.  In this case the
+dimension-determining rule is the last one in the picture.
+
+@<Handle a special rule that determines the box size@>=
+{ 
+  mpx->pic_wd=mpx->h; mpx->pic_dp=mpx->v; mpx->pic_ht=ht-mpx->v; 
+}
+
+@ @<Glob...@>=
+web_integer pic_dp; web_integer pic_ht; web_integer pic_wd; /* picture dimensions from special rule */
+
+@ The following  initialization and clean-up is required.  We do a little more
+initialization than is absolutely necessary since some compilers might complain
+if the variables are uninitialized when |do_set_char| tests them.
+
+@c 
+static void mpx_start_picture (MPX mpx) { 
+  mpx->fonts_used=false;
+  mpx->rules_used=false;
+  mpx->graphics_used=false;
+  mpx->str_f=-1;
+  mpx->str_v=0;
+  mpx->str_h2=0;
+  mpx->str_scale=1.0; /* values don't matter */
+  mpx->dmp_str_v = 0.0;
+  mpx->dmp_str_h2 = 0.0;
+  mpx->str_size = 0.0;
+  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,
+          "begingroup save %s_p,_r,_s,_n; picture _p; _p=nullpicture;\n", 
+          (mpx->mode == mpx_tex_mode ? "" : "_C,_D,"));
+}
+
+static void mpx_stop_picture (MPX mpx) {
+  double w,h,dd; /* width, height, negative depth in PostScript points */
+  if ( mpx->str_f>=0 )
+    mpx_finish_last_char(mpx);
+  if (mpx->mode==mpx_tex_mode) {
+    @<Print a \&{setbounds} command based on picture dimensions@>;
+  }
+  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,"_p endgroup\n");
+}
+
+@ @<Print a \&{setbounds} command based on picture dimensions@>=
+dd=-mpx->pic_dp*mpx->conv;
+w=mpx->conv*mpx->pic_wd; 
+h=mpx->conv*mpx->pic_ht;
+fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,
+        "setbounds _p to (0,%1.4f)--(%1.4f,%1.4f)--\n" 
+        " (%1.4f,%1.4f)--(0,%1.4f)--cycle;\n",dd,w,dd,w,h,h)
+
+@* Translation to symbolic form.
+
+The main work of \.{DVItoMP} is accomplished by the |do_dvi_commands|
+procedure, which produces the output for an entire page, assuming that the
+|bop| command for that page has already been processed. This procedure is
+essentially an interpretive routine that reads and acts on the \.{DVI}
+commands.  It is also capable of executing the typesetting commands for
+a character in a virtual font.
+
+@ The definition of \.{DVI} files refers to six registers,
+$(h,v,w,x,y,z)$, which hold web_integer values in \.{DVI} units.
+These units come directly from the input file except they need to be
+rescaled when typesetting characters from a virtual font.
+The stack of $(h,v,w,x,y,z)$ values is represented by six arrays
+called |hstack|, \dots, |zstack|.
+
+@<Glob...@>=
+web_integer w;web_integer x;web_integer y;web_integer z;
+  /* current state values (|h| and |v| have already been declared) */
+web_integer hstack[(stack_size+1)];
+web_integer vstack[(stack_size+1)];
+web_integer wstack[(stack_size+1)];
+web_integer xstack[(stack_size+1)];
+web_integer ystack[(stack_size+1)];
+web_integer zstack[(stack_size+1)]; /* pushed down values in \.{DVI} units */
+web_integer stk_siz; /* the current stack size */
+double dvi_scale; /* converts units of current input source to \.{DVI} units */
+
+@ @<Do initialization required before starting a new page@>=
+mpx->dvi_scale=1.0;
+mpx->stk_siz=0;
+mpx->h=0; mpx->v=0;
+mpx->Xslant = 0.0; mpx->Xheight = 0.0
+
+@ Next, we need procedures to handle |push| and |pop| commands.
+
+@c @<Declare procedures to handle color commands@>
+static void mpx_do_push (MPX mpx) {
+  if ( mpx->stk_siz==stack_size )
+    mpx_abort(mpx,"DVItoMP capacity exceeded (stack size=%d)",stack_size);
+@.DVItoMP capacity exceeded...@>
+  mpx->hstack[mpx->stk_siz]=mpx->h; 
+  mpx->vstack[mpx->stk_siz]=mpx->v; mpx->wstack[mpx->stk_siz]=mpx->w;
+  mpx->xstack[mpx->stk_siz]=mpx->x; 
+  mpx->ystack[mpx->stk_siz]=mpx->y; mpx->zstack[mpx->stk_siz]=mpx->z;
+  incr(mpx->stk_siz);
+}
+
+static void mpx_do_pop (MPX mpx) { 
+  if ( mpx->stk_siz==0 ) 
+    bad_dvi("attempt to pop empty stack");
+  else { 
+    decr(mpx->stk_siz);
+    mpx->h=mpx->hstack[mpx->stk_siz]; 
+    mpx->v=mpx->vstack[mpx->stk_siz]; mpx->w=mpx->wstack[mpx->stk_siz];
+    mpx->x=mpx->xstack[mpx->stk_siz]; 
+    mpx->y=mpx->ystack[mpx->stk_siz]; mpx->z=mpx->zstack[mpx->stk_siz];
+  }
+}
+
+@ The |set_virtual_char| procedure is mutually recursive with 
+|do_dvi_commands|.  This is really a supervisory
+@^recursion@>
+procedure that calls |do_set_char| or adjusts the input source to read
+typesetting commands for a character in a virtual font.
+
+@c 
+static void mpx_do_dvi_commands (MPX mpx);
+static void mpx_set_virtual_char (MPX mpx,web_integer f, web_integer c) {
+  double old_scale; /* original value of |dvi_scale| */
+  unsigned old_buf_ptr; /* original value of the input pointer |buf_ptr| */
+  unsigned old_fbase,old_ftop; /* originally applicable part of the |font_num| table */
+  if ( mpx->fbase[f]==0 )
+    mpx_do_set_char(mpx, f,c);
+  else { 
+    old_fbase=mpx->cur_fbase; old_ftop=mpx->cur_ftop;
+    mpx->cur_fbase=(unsigned int)mpx->fbase[f];
+    mpx->cur_ftop=(unsigned int)mpx->ftop[f];
+    old_scale=mpx->dvi_scale;
+    mpx->dvi_scale=mpx->dvi_scale*mpx->font_scaled_size[f];
+    old_buf_ptr=mpx->buf_ptr;
+    mpx->buf_ptr=(unsigned int)start_cmd(f,c);
+    mpx_do_push(mpx);
+    mpx_do_dvi_commands(mpx);
+    mpx_do_pop(mpx);@/
+    mpx->buf_ptr=old_buf_ptr;
+    mpx->dvi_scale=old_scale;
+    mpx->cur_fbase=old_fbase;
+    mpx->cur_ftop=old_ftop;
+  }
+}
+
+@ Before we get into the details of |do_dvi_commands|, it is convenient to
+consider a simpler routine that computes the first parameter of each
+opcode.
+
+@d four_cases(A) (A): case (A)+1: case (A)+2: case (A)+3
+@d eight_cases(A) four_cases((A)): case four_cases((A)+4)
+@d sixteen_cases(A) eight_cases((A)): case eight_cases((A)+8)
+@d thirty_two_cases(A) sixteen_cases((A)): case sixteen_cases((A)+16)
+@d sixty_four_cases(A) thirty_two_cases((A)): case thirty_two_cases((A)+32)
+
+@<Declare a function called |first_par|@>=
+static web_integer mpx_first_par (MPX mpx, unsigned int o) { 
+  switch (o) {
+  case sixty_four_cases(set_char_0):
+  case sixty_four_cases(set_char_0+64):
+    return (web_integer)(o-set_char_0);
+    break;
+  case set1: case put1: case fnt1: case xxx1: case fnt_def1: 
+    return mpx_get_byte(mpx);
+    break;
+  case set1+1: case put1+1: case fnt1+1: case xxx1+1: case fnt_def1+1: 
+    return mpx_get_two_bytes(mpx);
+    break;
+  case set1+2: case put1+2: case fnt1+2: case xxx1+2: case fnt_def1+2: 
+    return mpx_get_three_bytes(mpx);
+    break;
+  case right1: case w1: case x1: case down1: case y1: case z1: 
+    return mpx_signed_byte(mpx);
+    break;
+  case right1+1: case w1+1: case x1+1: case down1+1: case y1+1: case z1+1: 
+    return mpx_signed_pair(mpx);
+    break;
+  case right1+2: case w1+2: case x1+2: case down1+2: case y1+2: case z1+2: 
+    return mpx_signed_trio(mpx);
+    break;
+  case set1+3: case set_rule: case put1+3: case put_rule: 
+  case right1+3: case w1+3: case x1+3: case down1+3: case y1+3: case z1+3: 
+  case fnt1+3: case xxx1+3: case fnt_def1+3:
+    return mpx_signed_quad(mpx);
+    break;
+  case nop: case bop: case eop: case push: case pop: case pre: case post:
+  case post_post: case undefined_commands: 
+    return 0;
+    break;
+  case w0: return mpx->w; break;
+  case x0: return mpx->x; break;
+  case y0: return mpx->y; break;
+  case z0: return mpx->z; break;
+  case sixty_four_cases(fnt_num_0): 
+    return (web_integer)(o-fnt_num_0);
+    break;
+  }
+  return 0; /* compiler warning */
+}
+
+@ Here is the |do_dvi_commands| procedure.
+
+@c 
+static void mpx_do_dvi_commands (MPX mpx) {
+  unsigned int o; /* operation code of the current command */
+  web_integer p,q; /* parameters of the current command */
+  web_integer cur_font; /* current internal font number */
+  if ( (mpx->cur_fbase<mpx->cur_ftop) && (mpx->buf_ptr<virtual_space) )
+    cur_font=mpx_select_font(mpx, mpx->font_num[mpx->cur_ftop-1]); /* select first local font */
+  else 
+    cur_font=max_fnums+1; /* current font is undefined */
+  mpx->w=0; mpx->x=0; mpx->y=0; mpx->z=0; /* initialize the state variables */
+  while ( true ) {
+    @<Translate the next command in the \.{DVI} file; |return| if it was |eop|@>;
+  }
+}
+
+@ The multiway switch in |first_par|, above, was organized by the length
+of each command; the one in |do_dvi_commands| is organized by the semantics.
+
+@ @<Translate the next command...@>=
+{ 
+  o=(unsigned int)mpx_get_byte(mpx); 
+  p=mpx_first_par(mpx, o);
+  if ( feof(mpx->dvi_file) ) 
+    bad_dvi("the DVI file ended prematurely");
+@.the DVI file ended prematurely@>
+  if ( o<set1+4 ) { /* |set_char_0| through |set_char_127|, |set1| through |set4| */
+    if ( cur_font>max_fnums ) {
+      if ( mpx->vf_reading )
+        mpx_abort(mpx,"no font selected for character %d in virtual font", p);
+      else 
+        bad_dvi_two("no font selected for character %d",p);
+    }
+@.no font selected@>
+    mpx_set_virtual_char(mpx, cur_font,p);
+    mpx->h += @<Width of character |p| in font |cur_font|@>;
+  } else {
+    switch(o) {
+    case four_cases(put1): 
+      mpx_set_virtual_char(mpx, cur_font, p);
+      break;
+    case set_rule: 
+      q=(web_integer)trunc(mpx_signed_quad(mpx)*mpx->dvi_scale);
+      mpx_do_set_rule(mpx, (web_integer)trunc(p*mpx->dvi_scale),q);
+      mpx->h += q;
+      break;
+    case put_rule: 
+      q=(web_integer)trunc(mpx_signed_quad(mpx)*mpx->dvi_scale);
+      mpx_do_set_rule(mpx, (web_integer)trunc(p*mpx->dvi_scale),q);
+      break;
+    @<Additional cases for translating \.{DVI} command |o| with
+       first parameter |p|@>@;
+    case undefined_commands:
+      bad_dvi_two("undefined command %d",o);
+@.undefined command@>
+      break;
+    } /* all cases have been enumerated */
+  }
+}
+
+@ @<Additional cases for translating \.{DVI} command |o|...@>=
+case four_cases(xxx1): 
+  mpx_do_xxx(mpx, p);
+  break;
+case pre: case post: case post_post: 
+  bad_dvi("preamble or postamble within a page!");
+@.preamble or postamble within a page@>
+  break;
+
+@ @<Additional cases for translating \.{DVI} command |o|...@>=
+case nop: 
+  break;
+case bop: 
+  bad_dvi("bop occurred before eop");
+@.bop occurred before eop@>
+  break;
+case eop: 
+  return;
+  break;
+case push: 
+  mpx_do_push(mpx);
+  break;
+case pop: 
+  mpx_do_pop(mpx);
+  break;
+
+@ @<Additional cases for translating \.{DVI} command |o|...@>=
+case four_cases(right1):
+  mpx->h += trunc(p*mpx->dvi_scale);
+  break;
+case w0: case four_cases(w1): 
+  mpx->w = (web_integer)trunc(p*mpx->dvi_scale); mpx->h += mpx->w;
+  break;
+case x0: case four_cases(x1): 
+  mpx->x = (web_integer)trunc(p*mpx->dvi_scale); mpx->h += mpx->x;
+  break;
+case four_cases(down1):
+  mpx->v += trunc(p*mpx->dvi_scale);
+  break;
+case y0: case four_cases(y1): 
+  mpx->y = (web_integer)trunc(p*mpx->dvi_scale); mpx->v += mpx->y;
+  break;
+case z0: case four_cases(z1): 
+  mpx->z = (web_integer)trunc(p*mpx->dvi_scale); mpx->v += mpx->z;
+  break;
+
+@ @<Additional cases for translating \.{DVI} command |o|...@>=
+case sixty_four_cases(fnt_num_0): case four_cases(fnt1):
+  cur_font = mpx_select_font(mpx, p);
+  break;
+case four_cases(fnt_def1): 
+  mpx_define_font(mpx, p);
+  break;
+
+@* The main program.
+Now we are ready to put it all together. This is where \.{DVItoMP} starts,
+and where it ends.
+
+@c 
+static int mpx_dvitomp (MPX mpx, char *dviname) {
+  int k;
+  mpx->dviname = dviname;
+  mpx_open_dvi_file(mpx);
+  @<Process the preamble@>;
+  mpx_open_mpxfile(mpx);
+  if (mpx->banner!=NULL)
+    fprintf (mpx->mpxfile,"%s\n",mpx->banner);
+  while ( true ) { 
+    @<Advance to the next |bop| command@>;
+    for (k=0;k<=10;k++) 
+      (void)mpx_signed_quad(mpx);
+    @<Do initialization required before starting a new page@>;
+    mpx_start_picture(mpx);
+    mpx_do_dvi_commands(mpx);
+    if ( mpx->stk_siz!=0 )
+      bad_dvi("stack not empty at end of page");
+@.stack not empty...@>
+    mpx_stop_picture(mpx);
+    fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,"mpxbreak\n");
+  }
+  if(mpx->dvi_file)
+    mpx_fclose(mpx,mpx->dvi_file);
+  if ( mpx->history<=mpx_cksum_trouble )
+    return 0;
+  else 
+    return mpx->history;
+}
+
+@ The main program needs a few global variables in order to do its work.
+
+@<Glob...@>=
+web_integer k;web_integer p; /* general purpose registers */
+web_integer numerator;web_integer denominator; /* stated conversion ratio */
+
+@ @<Process the preamble@>=
+{
+  int p;
+  p=mpx_get_byte(mpx); /* fetch the first byte */
+  if ( p!=pre ) 
+    bad_dvi("First byte isn""t start of preamble!");
+@.First byte isn't...@>
+  p=mpx_get_byte(mpx); /* fetch the identification byte */
+  if ( p!=id_byte )
+    mpx_warn(mpx,"identification in byte 1 should be %d!", id_byte);
+@.identification...should be n@>
+  @<Compute the conversion factor@>;
+  p=mpx_get_byte(mpx); /* fetch the length of the introductory comment */
+  while (p>0 ){ 
+    decr(p); 
+    (void)mpx_get_byte(mpx);
+  }
+}
+
+@ The conversion factor |conv| is figured as follows: There are exactly
+|n/d| decimicrons per \.{DVI} unit, and 254000 decimicrons per inch,
+and |resolution| pixels per inch. Then we have to adjust this
+by the stated amount of magnification.  No such adjustment is needed for
+|dvi_per_fix| since it is used to convert design sizes.
+
+@<Compute the conversion factor@>=
+mpx->numerator=mpx_signed_quad(mpx); mpx->denominator=mpx_signed_quad(mpx);
+if ( (mpx->numerator<=0)||(mpx->denominator<=0) )
+  bad_dvi("bad scale ratio in preamble");
+@.bad scale ratio@>
+mpx->mag=mpx_signed_quad(mpx)/1000.0;
+if ( mpx->mag<=0.0 ) 
+  bad_dvi("magnification isn't positive");
+@.magnification isn't positive@>
+mpx->conv=(mpx->numerator/254000.0)*(72.0/mpx->denominator)*mpx->mag;
+mpx->dvi_per_fix=(254000.0/mpx->numerator)*(mpx->denominator/72.27)/1048576.0;
+
+@ @<Advance to the next |bop| command@>=
+do {  
+  int p;
+  k=mpx_get_byte(mpx);
+  if ( (k>=fnt_def1)&&(k<fnt_def1+4) ){ 
+    p=mpx_first_par(mpx, (unsigned int)k); 
+    mpx_define_font(mpx, p); k=nop;
+  }
+} while (k==nop);
+if ( k==post ) 
+  break;
+if ( k!=bop ) 
+  bad_dvi("missing bop");
+@.missing bop@>
+
+
+@ Global filenames.
+
+@<Global...@>=
+char *dviname;
+
+@* Color support.
+These changes support \.{dvips}-style ``\.{color push NAME}'' and
+``\.{color pop}'' specials. We store a list of named colors, sorted by
+name, and decorate the relevant drawing commands with ``\.{withcolor
+(r,g,b)}'' specifiers while a color is defined.
+
+@ A constant bounding the size of the named-color array.
+
+@d max_named_colors 100 /* maximum number of distinct named colors */
+
+@ Then we declare a record for color types.
+
+@<Types...@>=
+typedef struct named_color_record {
+  const char *name; /* color name */
+  const char *value; /* text to pass to MetaPost */
+} named_color_record;
+
+@ Declare the named-color array itself.
+
+@<Globals@>=
+named_color_record named_colors[(max_named_colors+1)];
+  /* stores information about named colors, in sorted order by name */
+web_integer num_named_colors; /* number of elements of |named_colors| that are valid */
+
+@ This function, used only during initialization, defines a named color.
+
+@c
+static void mpx_def_named_color (MPX mpx, const char *n, const char *v) {
+  mpx->num_named_colors++;
+  assert(mpx->num_named_colors<max_named_colors);
+  mpx->named_colors[mpx->num_named_colors].name = n;
+  mpx->named_colors[mpx->num_named_colors].value = v;
+}
+
+@ @<Declarations@>=
+static void mpx_def_named_color (MPX mpx, const char *n, const char *v);
+
+@ During the initialization phase, we define values for all the named
+colors defined in \.{colordvi.tex}. CMYK-to-RGB conversion by GhostScript.
+
+This list has to be sorted alphabetically!
+
+@<Set initial values@>=
+mpx->num_named_colors = 0;
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Apricot", "(1.0, 0.680006, 0.480006)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Aquamarine", "(0.180006, 1.0, 0.7)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Bittersweet", "(0.760012, 0.0100122, 0.0)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Black", "(0.0, 0.0, 0.0)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Blue", "(0.0, 0.0, 1.0)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "BlueGreen", "(0.15, 1.0, 0.669994)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "BlueViolet", "(0.1, 0.05, 0.960012)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "BrickRed", "(0.719994, 0.0, 0.0)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Brown", "(0.4, 0.0, 0.0)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "BurntOrange", "(1.0, 0.489988, 0.0)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "CadetBlue", "(0.380006, 0.430006, 0.769994)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "CarnationPink", "(1.0, 0.369994, 1.0)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Cerulean", "(0.0600122, 0.889988, 1.0)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "CornflowerBlue", "(0.35, 0.869994, 1.0)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Cyan", "(0.0, 1.0, 1.0)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Dandelion", "(1.0, 0.710012, 0.160012)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "DarkOrchid", "(0.6, 0.2, 0.8)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Emerald", "(0.0, 1.0, 0.5)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "ForestGreen", "(0.0, 0.880006, 0.0)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Fuchsia", "(0.45, 0.00998169, 0.919994)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Goldenrod", "(1.0, 0.9, 0.160012)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Gray", "(0.5, 0.5, 0.5)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Green", "(0.0, 1.0, 0.0)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "GreenYellow", "(0.85, 1.0, 0.310012)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "JungleGreen", "(0.0100122, 1.0, 0.480006)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Lavender", "(1.0, 0.519994, 1.0)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "LimeGreen", "(0.5, 1.0, 0.0)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Magenta", "(1.0, 0.0, 1.0)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Mahogany", "(0.65, 0.0, 0.0)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Maroon", "(0.680006, 0.0, 0.0)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Melon", "(1.0, 0.539988, 0.5)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "MidnightBlue", "(0.0, 0.439988, 0.569994)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Mulberry", "(0.640018, 0.0800061, 0.980006)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "NavyBlue", "(0.0600122, 0.460012, 1.0)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "OliveGreen", "(0.0, 0.6, 0.0)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Orange", "(1.0, 0.389988, 0.130006)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "OrangeRed", "(1.0, 0.0, 0.5)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Orchid", "(0.680006, 0.360012, 1.0)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Peach", "(1.0, 0.5, 0.3)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Periwinkle", "(0.430006, 0.45, 1.0)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "PineGreen", "(0.0, 0.75, 0.160012)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Plum", "(0.5, 0.0, 1.0)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "ProcessBlue", "(0.0399878, 1.0, 1.0)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Purple", "(0.55, 0.139988, 1.0)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "RawSienna", "(0.55, 0.0, 0.0)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Red", "(1.0, 0.0, 0.0)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "RedOrange", "(1.0, 0.230006, 0.130006)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "RedViolet", "(0.590018, 0.0, 0.660012)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Rhodamine", "(1.0, 0.180006, 1.0)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "RoyalBlue", "(0.0, 0.5, 1.0)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "RoyalPurple", "(0.25, 0.1, 1.0)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "RubineRed", "(1.0, 0.0, 0.869994)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Salmon", "(1.0, 0.469994, 0.619994)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "SeaGreen", "(0.310012, 1.0, 0.5)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Sepia", "(0.3, 0.0, 0.0)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "SkyBlue", "(0.380006, 1.0, 0.880006)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "SpringGreen", "(0.739988, 1.0, 0.239988)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Tan", "(0.860012, 0.580006, 0.439988)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "TealBlue", "(0.119994, 0.980006, 0.640018)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Thistle", "(0.880006, 0.410012, 1.0)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Turquoise", "(0.15, 1.0, 0.8)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Violet", "(0.210012, 0.119994, 1.0)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "VioletRed", "(1.0, 0.189988, 1.0)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "White", "(1.0, 1.0, 1.0)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "WildStrawberry", "(1.0, 0.0399878, 0.610012)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "Yellow", "(1.0, 1.0, 0.0)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "YellowGreen", "(0.560012, 1.0, 0.260012)");
+mpx_def_named_color(mpx, "YellowOrange", "(1.0, 0.580006, 0.0)");
+
+@ Color commands get a separate warning procedure. |warn| sets |history :=
+mpx_warning_given|, which causes a nonzero exit status; but color errors are
+trivial and should leave the exit status zero.
+
+@d color_warn(A) mpx_warn(mpx,A)
+@d color_warn_two(A,B) mpx_warn(mpx,"%s%s",A,B)
+
+@ The |do_xxx| procedure handles DVI specials (defined with the |xxx1...xxx4| commands).
+
+@d XXX_BUF 256
+
+@<Declare procedures to handle color commands@>=
+static void mpx_do_xxx (MPX mpx, web_integer p)
+{
+  unsigned char buf[(XXX_BUF+1)]; /* FIXME: Fixed size buffer. */
+  web_integer l, r, m, k, len;
+  boolean  found;
+  int bufsiz = XXX_BUF;
+  len = 0;
+  while ( ( p > 0) && (len < bufsiz) ) {
+    buf[len] = (unsigned char)mpx_get_byte(mpx);
+    decr(p); incr(len);
+  }
+  @<Check whether |buf| contains a color command; if not, |goto XXXX|@>
+  if ( p > 0 ) {
+     color_warn("long \"color\" special ignored"); 
+     goto XXXX; 
+  }
+  if ( @<|buf| contains a color pop command@> ) {
+     @<Handle a color pop command@>
+  } else if ( @<|buf| contains a color push command@> ) {
+     @<Handle a color push command@>
+  } else {
+     color_warn("unknown \"color\" special ignored"); 
+     goto XXXX; 
+  }
+XXXX: 
+  for (k = 1;k<=p;k++) (void)mpx_get_byte(mpx);
+}
+
+@
+
+@<Check whether |buf| contains a color command; if not, |goto XXXX|@>=
+if ( (len <= 5)
+   || (buf[0] != 'c')
+   || (buf[1] != 'o')
+   || (buf[2] != 'l')
+   || (buf[3] != 'o')
+   || (buf[4] != 'r')
+   || (buf[5] != ' ')
+  ) goto XXXX;
+
+@ @<|buf| contains a color push command@>=
+(len >= 11) && 
+ (buf[6] == 'p') && 
+ (buf[7] == 'u') && 
+ (buf[8] == 's') && 
+ (buf[9] == 'h') && 
+ (buf[10] == ' ')
+
+@ @<|buf| contains a color pop command@>=
+(len == 9) && 
+(buf[6] == 'p') && 
+(buf[7] == 'o') && 
+(buf[8] == 'p')
+
+@ The \.{color push} and \.{pop} commands imply a color stack, so we need a
+global variable to hold that stack.
+
+@d max_color_stack_depth 10 /* maximum depth of saved color stack */
+
+@ Here's the actual stack variables.
+
+@<Globals@>=
+web_integer color_stack_depth; /* current depth of saved color stack */
+char *color_stack[(max_color_stack_depth+1)]; /* saved color stack */
+
+@ Initialize the stack to empty.
+
+@<Set initial values@>=
+mpx->color_stack_depth = 0;
+
+@ \.{color pop} just pops the stack.
+
+@<Handle a color pop command@>=
+mpx_finish_last_char(mpx);
+if (mpx->color_stack_depth > 0 ) {
+  free(mpx->color_stack[mpx->color_stack_depth]);
+  decr(mpx->color_stack_depth);
+} else {
+  color_warn("color stack underflow");
+}
+
+@ \.{color push} pushes a color onto the stack.
+
+@<Handle a color push command@>=
+mpx_finish_last_char(mpx);
+if ( mpx->color_stack_depth >= max_color_stack_depth )
+  mpx_abort(mpx,"color stack overflow");
+incr(mpx->color_stack_depth);
+/*  I don't know how to do string operations in Pascal.  */
+/*  Skip over extra spaces after 'color push'.  */
+l = 11;
+while ( (l < len - 1) && (buf[l] == ' ') ) incr(l);
+if ( @<|buf[l]| contains an rgb command@> ) {
+  @<Handle a color push rgb command@>
+} else if ( @<|buf[l]| contains a cmyk command@> ) {
+  @<Handle a color push cmyk command@>
+} else if ( @<|buf[l]| contains a gray command@> ) {
+  @<Handle a color push gray command@>
+} else {
+  @<Handle a named color push command@>
+}
+
+@ @<|buf[l]| contains an rgb command@>=
+(l + 4 < len)
+&& (buf[l]   == 'r')
+&& (buf[l+1] == 'g')
+&& (buf[l+2] == 'b')
+&& (buf[l+3] == ' ')
+
+@ @<Handle a color push rgb command@>=
+l = l + 4;
+while ( (l < len) && (buf[l] == ' ') ) incr(l); /*  Remove spaces at end of buf  */
+while ( (len > l) && (buf[len - 1] == ' ') ) decr(len);
+mpx->color_stack[mpx->color_stack_depth]=xmalloc((size_t)(len-l+3),1);
+k = 0;
+@<Copy |buf[l]| to |color_stack[color_stack_depth][k]| in tuple form@>
+
+@ @<|buf[l]| contains a gray command@>=
+(l + 5 < len)
+&& (buf[l]   == 'g')
+&& (buf[l+1] == 'r')
+&& (buf[l+2] == 'a')
+&& (buf[l+3] == 'y')
+&& (buf[l+4] == ' ')
+
+@ @<Handle a color push gray command@>=
+l = l + 5;
+while ( (l < len) && (buf[l] == ' ') ) incr(l); /*  Remove spaces at end of buf  */
+while ( (len > l) && (buf[len - 1] == ' ') ) decr(len);
+mpx->color_stack[mpx->color_stack_depth]=xmalloc((size_t)(len-l+9),1);
+strcpy(mpx->color_stack[mpx->color_stack_depth],"white*");
+k = 6;
+@<Copy |buf[l]| to |color_stack[color_stack_depth][k]| in tuple form@>
+
+@ @<|buf[l]| contains a cmyk command@>=
+(l + 5 < len)
+&& (buf[l]   == 'c')
+&& (buf[l+1] == 'm')
+&& (buf[l+2] == 'y')
+&& (buf[l+3] == 'k')
+&& (buf[l+4] == ' ')
+
+@ @<Handle a color push cmyk command@>=
+l = l + 5;
+while ( (l < len) && (buf[l] == ' ') ) incr(l);
+/*  Remove spaces at end of buf  */
+while ( (len > l) && (buf[len - 1] == ' ') ) decr(len);
+mpx->color_stack[mpx->color_stack_depth]=xmalloc((size_t)(len-l+7),1);
+strcpy(mpx->color_stack[mpx->color_stack_depth],"cmyk");
+k = 4;
+@<Copy |buf[l]| to |color_stack[color_stack_depth][k]| in tuple form@>
+
+@ @<Copy |buf[l]| to |color_stack[color_stack_depth][k]| in tuple form@>=
+mpx->color_stack[mpx->color_stack_depth][k] = '(';
+incr(k);
+while ( l < len ) {
+  if ( buf[l] == ' ' ) {
+    mpx->color_stack[mpx->color_stack_depth][k] = ',';
+    while ( (l < len) && (buf[l] == ' ') ) incr(l);
+    incr(k);
+  } else {
+    mpx->color_stack[mpx->color_stack_depth][k] = (char)buf[l];
+    incr(l);
+    incr(k);
+  }
+}
+mpx->color_stack[mpx->color_stack_depth][k] = ')';
+mpx->color_stack[mpx->color_stack_depth][k+1] = 0;
+
+@ Binary-search the |named_colors| array, then push the found color onto
+the stack.
+
+@<Handle a named color push command@>=
+for (k = l;k<=len - 1;k++) {
+  buf[k - l] = xchr(buf[k]);
+}
+buf[len - l] = 0;
+len = len - l;
+l = 1; r = mpx->num_named_colors;
+found = false;
+while ( (l <= r) && ! found ) {
+  m = (l + r) / 2; k = strcmp((char *)(buf), mpx->named_colors[m].name);
+  if ( k == 0 ) {
+    mpx->color_stack[mpx->color_stack_depth]=xstrdup(mpx->named_colors[m].value);
+    found = true;
+  } else if ( k < 0 ) {
+    r = m - 1;
+  } else {
+    l = m + 1;
+  }
+}
+if (! found ) {
+   color_warn_two("non-hardcoded color \"%s\" in \"color push\" command", buf);
+   mpx->color_stack[mpx->color_stack_depth]=xstrdup((char *)(buf));
+}
+
+@ Last but not least, this code snippet prints a \.{withcolor} specifier
+for the top of the color stack, if the stack is nonempty.
+
+@<Print a \.{withcolor} specifier if appropriate@>=
+if ( mpx->color_stack_depth > 0 ) {
+  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile," withcolor %s\n",mpx->color_stack[mpx->color_stack_depth]);
+}
+
+
+@* \[4] Dmp.
+
+This program reads device-independent troff output files,
+and converts them into a symbolic form understood by MetaPost.  Some
+of the code was borrowed from DVItoMP.  It understands all the D? graphics
+functions that dpost does but it ignores `x X' device control functions
+such as `x X SetColor:...', `x X BeginPath:', and `x X DrawPath:...'.
+
+The output file is a sequence of MetaPost picture expressions, one for every
+page in the input file.  It makes no difference where the input file comes
+from, but it is intended to process the result of running eqn and troff on
+the output of MPtoTR.  Such a file contains one page for every btex...etex
+block in the original input.  This program then creates a corresponding
+sequence of MetaPost picture expressions for use as an auxiliary input file.
+Since MetaPost expects such files to have the extension .mpx, the output
+is sometimes called an `mpx' file.
+
+@d SHIFTS	100		/* maximum number of characters with special shifts */
+@d MAXCHARS 256		/* character codes fall in the range 0..MAXCHARS-1 */
+
+@d is_specchar(c)	(!mpx->gflag && (c)<=2)	/* does charcode c identify a special char? */
+@d LWscale	0.03		/* line width for graphics as a fraction of pointsize */
+@d YCORR 12.0		/* V coordinate of reference point in (big) points */
+
+@<Globals@>=
+int next_specfnt[(max_fnums+1)];	/* used to link special fonts together */
+int shiftchar[SHIFTS];		/* charcode of character to shift, else -1 */
+float shifth[SHIFTS];
+float shiftv[SHIFTS];	/* shift vals/fontsize (y is upward) */
+int shiftptr;		/* number of entries in shift tables */
+int shiftbase[(max_fnums+1)];		/* initial index into shifth,shiftv,shiftchar */
+int specfnt;		/* int. num. of first special font (or FCOUNT) */
+int *specf_tail ;	/* tail of specfnt list |(*specf_tail==FCOUNT)| */
+float cursize;			/* current type size in (big) points */
+unsigned int curfont;			/* internal number for current font */
+float Xslant;			/* degrees additional slant for all fonts */
+float Xheight;			/* yscale fonts to this height if nonzero */
+float sizescale;		/* groff font size scaling factor */
+int gflag;			/* non-zero if using groff fonts */
+float unit;		/* (big) points per troff unit (0 when unset) */
+
+@ @<Set initial...@>=
+mpx->shiftptr = 0;
+mpx->specfnt = (max_fnums+1);
+mpx->specf_tail = &(mpx->specfnt);
+mpx->unit = 0.0;
+mpx->lnno = 0; /* this is a reset */
+mpx->gflag = 0;
+mpx->h = 0; mpx->v = 0; 
+
+@ @(mpxout.h@>=
+typedef char *(*mpx_file_finder)(MPX, const char *, const char *, int);
+enum mpx_filetype {
+  mpx_tfm_format,           /* |kpse_tfm_format| */
+  mpx_vf_format,            /* |kpse_vf_format| */
+  mpx_trfontmap_format,     /* |kpse_mpsupport_format| */
+  mpx_trcharadj_format,     /* |kpse_mpsupport_format| */
+  mpx_desc_format,          /* |kpse_troff_font_format| */
+  mpx_fontdesc_format,      /* |kpse_troff_font_format| */
+  mpx_specchar_format       /* |kpse_mpsupport_format| */
+};
+
+@ @<Globals@>=
+mpx_file_finder find_file;
+
+@ @<Declarations@>=
+static char *mpx_find_file (MPX mpx, const char *nam, const char *mode, int ftype);
+
+@ @c
+static char *mpx_find_file (MPX mpx, const char *nam, const char *mode, int ftype) {
+  (void) mpx;
+  if (mode[0] != 'r' || (! access (nam,R_OK)) || ftype) {  
+     return strdup(nam);
+  }
+  return NULL;
+}
+
+@ @<Set initial...@>=
+mpx->find_file = mpx_find_file;
+
+@ @<Declarations@>=
+static FILE *mpx_fsearch(MPX mpx, const char *nam, int format);
+
+@ @c
+static FILE *mpx_fsearch(MPX mpx, const char *nam, int format) {
+	FILE *f = NULL;
+	char *fname = (mpx->find_file)(mpx, nam, "r", format);
+	if (fname) {
+	  f = fopen(fname, "rb");
+      mpx_report(mpx,"%p = fopen(%s,\"rb\")",f, fname);
+	}
+	return f;
+}
+
+@ Hash tables (or rather: AVL lists)
+
+@ @<Types...@>=
+typedef struct {
+    char *name;
+    int num;
+} avl_entry;
+
+@ @c
+static int mpx_comp_name (void *p, const void *pa, const void *pb) {
+    (void)p;
+    return strcmp  (((const avl_entry *) pa)->name,
+                   ((const avl_entry *) pb)->name);
+}
+static void *destroy_avl_entry (void *pa) {
+    avl_entry *p;
+    p = (avl_entry *) pa;
+    free (p->name);
+    free (p);
+    return NULL;
+}
+static void *copy_avl_entry (const void *pa) { /* never used */
+    avl_entry *p, *q;
+    p = (avl_entry *) pa;
+    q = malloc(sizeof(avl_entry));
+    if (q!=NULL) {
+      q->name = strdup(p->name);
+      q->num = p->num;
+    }
+    return (void *)q;
+}
+
+
+@ @c
+static avl_tree mpx_avl_create (MPX mpx) {
+   avl_tree t;
+   t = avl_create(mpx_comp_name, 
+                  copy_avl_entry,
+                  destroy_avl_entry,
+                  malloc, free, NULL);
+   if (t==NULL) 
+     mpx_abort(mpx, "Memory allocation failure");
+   return t;
+}
+
+@ The only two operations on AVL lists are finding already existing
+items, or interning new items. Finding is handled by explicit |avl_find| 
+calls where needed, but it is wise to have a wrapper around |avl_probe|
+to check for memory errors.
+
+@c
+static void mpx_avl_probe(MPX mpx, avl_tree tab, avl_entry *p) {
+    avl_entry *r  = (avl_entry *)avl_find(p, tab);
+    if (r==NULL) {
+      if (avl_ins (p, tab, avl_false)<0)
+        mpx_abort(mpx,"Memory allocation failure");
+    }
+}
+
+
+@ Scanning Numbers
+
+The standard functions atoi(), atof(), and sscanf() provide ways of reading
+numbers from strings but they give no indication of how much of the string
+is consumed.  These homemade versions don't parse scientific notation.
+
+@<Globals@>=
+char *arg_tail;			/* char after the number just gotten; NULL on failure */
+
+@ @c 
+static int mpx_get_int(MPX mpx, char *s) {
+    register int i, d, neg;
+    if (s == NULL)
+	  goto BAD;
+    for (neg = 0;; s++) {
+	  if (*s == '-')
+	    neg = !neg;
+	  else if (*s != ' ' && *s != '\t')
+	    break;
+    }
+    if (i = *s - '0', 0 > i || i > 9)
+	  goto BAD;
+    while (d = *++s - '0', 0 <= d && d <= 9)
+	i = 10 * i + d;
+    mpx->arg_tail = s;
+    return neg ? -i : i;
+  BAD:
+    mpx->arg_tail = NULL;
+    return 0;
+}
+
+@ GROFF font description files use octal character codes
+|groff_font(5)|: The code can be any web_integer.  If it starts with
+a 0 it will be interpreted as octal; if it starts with  0x
+or 0X it will be intepreted as hexadecimal.
+
+@c 
+static int mpx_get_int_map(MPX mpx, char *s) {
+  register int i;
+  if (s == NULL)
+	goto BAD;
+  i = strtol(s, &(mpx->arg_tail), 0);
+  if (s == mpx->arg_tail)
+	goto BAD;
+  return i;
+BAD:
+  mpx->arg_tail = NULL;
+  return 0;
+}
+
+@ Troff output files contain few if any non-web_integers, but this program is
+prepared to read floats whenever they seem reasonable; i.e., when the
+number is not being used for character positioning.  (For non-PostScript
+applications h and v are usually in pixels and should be web_integers.)
+
+@c 
+static float mpx_get_float(MPX mpx, char *s) {
+  register int d, neg, digits;
+  register float x, y;
+  digits = 0;
+  neg = 0; x=0.0; 
+  if (s != NULL) {
+	for (neg = 0;; s++) {
+      if (*s == '-')
+		neg = !neg;
+	  else if (*s != ' ' && *s != '\t')
+		break;
+    }
+	x = 0.0;
+	while (d = *s - '0', 0 <= d && d <= 9) {
+      x = 10.0 * x + d;
+	  digits++;
+	  s++;
+	}
+	if (*s == '.') {
+	  y = 1.0;
+	  while (d = *++s - '0', 0 <= d && d <= 9) {
+	    y /= 10.0;
+		x += y * d;
+		digits++;
+	  }
+	}
+  }
+  if (digits == 0) {
+	mpx->arg_tail = NULL;
+	return 0.0;
+  }
+  mpx->arg_tail = s;
+  return neg ? -x : x;
+}
+
+@ GROFF font description files have metrics field
+of comma-separated web_integers. Traditional troff
+have a float in this position. The value is not
+used anyway - thus just skip the value,
+ eat all non-space chars.
+
+@c 
+static float mpx_get_float_map(MPX mpx, char *s) {
+    if (s != NULL) {
+	while (isspace(*s))
+	    s++;
+	while (!isspace(*s) && *s)
+	    s++;
+    }
+    mpx->arg_tail = s;
+    return 0;
+}
+
+
+@ Reading Initialization Files
+
+Read the database file, reserve internal font numbers and set
+the |font_name| entries.  Each line in the database file contains
+|<troff-name>\t,PostScript-name>\t<TeX-name>|
+or just 
+|<troff-name>\t,PostScript-name>| 
+if the \TeX\ name matches the PostScript name. (|\t| means one or more tabs.)
+
+@<Globals@>=
+avl_tree trfonts;
+
+@ @c
+static void mpx_read_fmap(MPX mpx, const char *dbase) {
+    FILE *fin;
+    avl_entry *tmp;
+    char *nam;			/* a font name being read */
+    char *buf;
+    mpx->nfonts = 0;
+    fin = mpx_fsearch(mpx,dbase, mpx_trfontmap_format);
+    if (fin==NULL)
+	  mpx_abort(mpx,"Cannot find %s", dbase);
+
+    mpx->trfonts = mpx_avl_create (mpx);
+    while ((buf = mpx_getline(mpx,fin)) != NULL) {
+	  if (mpx->nfonts == (max_fnums+1))
+	    mpx_abort(mpx,"Need to increase max_fnums");
+      nam = buf;    
+      while (*buf && *buf != '\t')
+        buf++;
+      if (nam==buf)
+        continue;
+      tmp = xmalloc(sizeof(avl_entry),1);
+      tmp->name = xmalloc (1,(buf-nam)+1);
+      strncpy(tmp->name,nam,(buf-nam));
+      tmp->name[(buf-nam)] = '\0';
+      tmp->num = (int)mpx->nfonts++;
+      assert(avl_ins (tmp, mpx->trfonts, avl_false) > 0);
+      if (*buf) {
+        buf++;
+	    while (*buf == '\t') buf++;
+        while (*buf && *buf != '\t') buf++; /* skip over psname */
+        while (*buf == '\t') buf++;
+        if (*buf)
+          nam = buf;
+        while (*buf) buf++; 
+      }
+      mpx->font_name[tmp->num] = xstrdup(nam);
+	  mpx->font_num[tmp->num] = -1;	/* indicate font is not mounted */
+    }
+    mpx_fclose(mpx,fin);
+}
+
+
+@ Some characters need their coordinates shifted in order to agree with
+troff's view of the world.  Logically, this information belongs in the
+font description files but it actually resides in a PostScript prolog
+that the troff output processor dpost reads.  Since that file is in
+PostScript and subject to change, we read the same information from
+a small auxiliary file that gives shift amounts relative to the font
+size with y upward.
+
+GROFF NOTE:
+The PostScript prologue in GNU groff's font directory does not
+contain any character shift information, so the following function
+becomes redundant.  Simply keeping an empty "trchars.adj" file
+around will do fine without requiring any changes to this program.
+
+@c 
+static void mpx_read_char_adj(MPX mpx, const char *adjfile) {
+    FILE *fin;
+    char buf[200];
+    avl_entry tmp, *p;
+    unsigned int i;
+
+    fin = mpx_fsearch(mpx,adjfile, mpx_trcharadj_format);
+    if (fin==NULL)
+	  mpx_abort(mpx,"Cannot find %s", adjfile);
+
+    for (i = 0; i < mpx->nfonts; i++)
+	mpx->shiftbase[i] = 0;
+    while (fgets(buf, 200, fin) != NULL) {
+	if (mpx->shiftptr == SHIFTS - 1)
+	    mpx_abort(mpx,"Need to increase SHIFTS");
+	if (buf[0] != ' ' && buf[0] != '\t') {
+	    for (i = 0; buf[i] != '\0'; i++)
+		  if (buf[i] == '\n')
+		    buf[i] = '\0';
+	    mpx->shiftchar[mpx->shiftptr++] = -1;
+        tmp.name = buf;
+        p = (avl_entry *)avl_find (&tmp, mpx->trfonts);
+	    if (p==NULL)
+		  mpx_abort(mpx,"%s refers to unknown font %s", adjfile, buf);
+	    mpx->shiftbase[p->num] = mpx->shiftptr;
+        
+	} else {
+	    mpx->shiftchar[mpx->shiftptr] = mpx_get_int(mpx,buf);
+	    mpx->shifth[mpx->shiftptr] = mpx_get_float(mpx,mpx->arg_tail);
+	    mpx->shiftv[mpx->shiftptr] = -mpx_get_float(mpx,mpx->arg_tail);
+	    if (mpx->arg_tail == NULL)
+		mpx_abort(mpx,"Bad shift entry : \"%s\"", buf);
+	    mpx->shiftptr++;
+	}
+    }
+    mpx->shiftchar[mpx->shiftptr++] = -1;
+    mpx_fclose(mpx,fin);
+}
+
+@ Read the DESC file of the troff device to gather information
+   about sizescale and whether running under groff.
+
+Ignore all commands not specially handled. This relieves
+of collecting commands without arguments here and also
+makes the program more robust in case of future DESC
+extensions.
+
+@c 
+static void mpx_read_desc(MPX mpx) {
+    const char *const k1[] = {
+	"res", "hor", "vert", "unitwidth", "paperwidth",
+	"paperlength", "biggestfont", "spare2", "encoding",
+	NULL
+    };
+    const char *const g1[] = {
+	"family", "paperheight", "postpro", "prepro",
+	"print", "image_generator", "broken",
+	NULL
+    };
+    char cmd[200];
+    FILE *fp;
+    int i, n;
+
+    fp = mpx_fsearch(mpx,"DESC", mpx_desc_format);
+    if (fp==NULL)
+	  mpx_abort(mpx,"Cannot find DESC");
+    while (fscanf(fp, "%199s", cmd) != EOF) {
+	if (*cmd == '#') {
+	    while ((i = getc(fp)) != EOF && i != '\n');
+	    continue;
+	}
+	if (strcmp(cmd, "fonts") == 0) {
+	    if (fscanf(fp, "%d", &n) != 1)
+		return;
+	    for (i = 0; i < n; i++)
+		if (fscanf(fp, "%*s") == EOF)
+		    return;
+	} else if (strcmp(cmd, "sizes") == 0) {
+	    while (fscanf(fp, "%d", &n) == 1 && n != 0);
+	} else if (strcmp(cmd, "styles") == 0 ||
+		   strcmp(cmd, "papersize") == 0) {
+	    mpx->gflag++;
+	    while ((i = getc(fp)) != EOF && i != '\n');
+	} else if (strcmp(cmd, "sizescale") == 0) {
+	    if (fscanf(fp, "%d", &n) == 1)
+		mpx->sizescale = (float)n;
+	    mpx->gflag++;
+	} else if (strcmp(cmd, "charset") == 0) {
+	    return;
+	} else {
+	    for (i = 0; k1[i]; i++)
+		if (strcmp(cmd, k1[i]) == 0) {
+		    if (fscanf(fp, "%*s") == EOF)
+			return;
+		    break;
+		}
+	    if (k1[i] == 0)
+		for (i = 0; g1[i]; i++)
+		    if (strcmp(cmd, g1[i]) == 0) {
+			if (fscanf(fp, "%*s") == EOF)
+			    return;
+			mpx->gflag = 1;
+			break;
+		    }
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+
+@ Given one line from the character description file for the font with
+internal number f, save the appropriate data in the charcodes[f] table.
+A return value of zero indicates a syntax error.
+
+GROFF:
+GNU groff uses an extended font description file format documented
+in |groff_font(5)|.  In order to allow parsing of groff's font files,
+this function needs to be rewritten as follows:
+
+\item{1.}The `metrics' field parsed by |mpx_get_float(lin);| may include
+   a comma-separated list of up to six decimal web_integers rather
+   than just a single floating-point number.
+
+\item{2.}The `charcode' field parsed by |lastcode = mpx_get_int(arg_tail);|
+   may be given either in decimal, octal, or hexadecimal format.
+
+@ @<Globals@>=
+avl_tree charcodes[(max_fnums+1)];	/* hash tables for translating char names */
+
+@ @c
+static int mpx_scan_desc_line(MPX mpx, int f, char *lin) {
+    static int lastcode;
+    avl_entry *tmp;
+    char *s, *t;
+    t = lin;
+    while (*lin != ' ' && *lin != '\t' && *lin != '\0')
+	  lin++;
+    if (lin==t)
+      return 1;
+    s = xmalloc((size_t)(lin-t+1),1);
+    strncpy(s,t,(size_t)(lin-t));
+    *(s+(lin-t)) = '\0';
+    while (*lin == ' ' || *lin == '\t')
+	  lin++;
+    if (*lin == '"') {
+	  if (lastcode < MAXCHARS) {
+        tmp = xmalloc(sizeof(avl_entry),1);
+        tmp->name = s ;
+        tmp->num = lastcode;
+        mpx_avl_probe (mpx, mpx->charcodes[f],tmp);
+      }
+    } else {
+	  (void) mpx_get_float_map(mpx,lin);
+	  (void) mpx_get_int(mpx,mpx->arg_tail);
+	  lastcode = mpx_get_int_map(mpx,mpx->arg_tail);
+	  if (mpx->arg_tail == NULL)
+	    return 0;
+	  if (lastcode < MAXCHARS) {
+        tmp = xmalloc(sizeof(avl_entry),1);
+        tmp->name = s ;
+        tmp->num = lastcode;
+        mpx_avl_probe (mpx, mpx->charcodes[f],tmp);
+      }
+    }
+    return 1;
+}
+
+@ Read the font description file for the font with the given troff name
+and update the data structures.  The result is the internal font number.
+
+@c 
+static int mpx_read_fontdesc(MPX mpx, char *nam) {	/* troff name */
+    char buf[200];
+    avl_entry tmp, *p;
+    FILE *fin;			/* input file */
+    int f;			/* internal font number */
+
+    if (mpx->unit == 0.0)
+	mpx_abort(mpx, "Resolution is not set soon enough");
+    tmp.name = nam;
+    p = (avl_entry *)avl_find (&tmp,mpx->trfonts);
+    if (p == NULL)
+	  mpx_abort(mpx, "Font was not in map file");
+    f = p->num;
+    fin = mpx_fsearch(mpx, nam, mpx_fontdesc_format);
+    if (fin==NULL)
+	  mpx_abort(mpx,"Cannot find %s", nam);
+    for (;;) {
+	  if (fgets(buf, 200, fin) == NULL)
+	    mpx_abort(mpx, "Description file for %s ends unexpectedly", nam);
+	  if (strncmp(buf, "special", 7) == 0) {
+	    *(mpx->specf_tail) = f;
+	    mpx->next_specfnt[f] = (max_fnums+1);
+	    mpx->specf_tail = &(mpx->next_specfnt[f]);
+	  } else if (strncmp(buf, "charset", 7) == 0)
+	    break;
+    }
+    mpx->charcodes[f] = mpx_avl_create (mpx);
+    while (fgets(buf, 200, fin) != NULL)
+	  if (mpx_scan_desc_line(mpx, f, buf) == 0)
+	    mpx_abort(mpx, "%s has a bad line in its description file: %s", nam, buf);
+    mpx_fclose(mpx,fin);
+    return f;
+}
+
+@		Page and Character Output
+
+@<Globals@>=
+boolean graphics_used;		/* nonzero if any graphics seen on this page */
+float dmp_str_h1;
+float dmp_str_v;		/* corrected start pos for current out string */
+float dmp_str_h2;			/* where the current output string ends */
+float str_size;			/* point size for this text string */
+
+
+@ Print any transformations required by the current Xslant and Xheight settings.
+
+@<Declarations@>=
+static void mpx_slant_and_ht(MPX mpx);
+
+@ @c
+static void mpx_slant_and_ht(MPX mpx) {
+ int i = 0;
+  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, "(");
+ if (mpx->Xslant != 0.0) {
+	fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, " slanted%.5f", mpx->Xslant);
+	i++;
+  }
+  if (mpx->Xheight != mpx->cursize && mpx->Xheight != 0.0 && mpx->cursize != 0.0) {
+	fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, " yscaled%.4f", mpx->Xheight / mpx->cursize);
+	i++;
+  }
+  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, ")");
+}
+
+
+@ Output character number c in the font with internal number f.
+
+@c 
+static void mpx_set_num_char(MPX mpx, int f, int c) {
+    float hh, vv;		/* corrected versions of h, v */
+    int i;
+
+    hh = (float)mpx->h;
+    vv = (float)mpx->v;
+    for (i = mpx->shiftbase[f]; mpx->shiftchar[i] >= 0 && i < SHIFTS; i++)
+	if (mpx->shiftchar[i] == c) {
+	    hh += (mpx->cursize / mpx->unit) * mpx->shifth[i];
+	    vv += (mpx->cursize / mpx->unit) * mpx->shiftv[i];
+	    break;
+	}
+    if (hh - mpx->dmp_str_h2 >= 1.0 || mpx->dmp_str_h2 - hh >= 1.0 || 
+        vv - mpx->dmp_str_v >= 1.0 || mpx->dmp_str_v - vv >= 1.0 || 
+        f != mpx->str_f || mpx->cursize != mpx->str_size) {
+	  if (mpx->str_f >= 0)
+	    mpx_finish_last_char(mpx);
+	  else if (!mpx->fonts_used)
+	    mpx_prepare_font_use(mpx);	/* first font usage on this page */
+	  if (!mpx->font_used[f])
+	    mpx_first_use(mpx,f);	/* first use of font f on this page */
+  	  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, "_s((");
+	  mpx->print_col = 3;
+	  mpx->str_f = f;
+	  mpx->dmp_str_v = vv;
+	  mpx->dmp_str_h1 = hh;
+	  mpx->str_size = mpx->cursize;
+    }
+    mpx_print_char(mpx, (unsigned char)c);
+    mpx->dmp_str_h2 = hh + char_width(f,c);
+}
+
+@ Output a string. 
+
+@c
+static void mpx_set_string(MPX mpx, char *cname) {
+    float hh;			/* corrected version of h, current horisontal position */
+
+    if (!*cname)
+	  return;
+    hh = (float)mpx->h;
+    mpx_set_num_char(mpx,(int)mpx->curfont, *cname);
+    hh +=  char_width(mpx->curfont,(int)*cname);
+    while (*++cname) {
+	  mpx_print_char(mpx,(unsigned char)*cname);
+	  hh += char_width(mpx->curfont,(int)*cname);
+    }
+    mpx->h = (web_integer)floor(hh+0.5);
+    mpx_finish_last_char(mpx);
+}
+
+@ Special Characters
+
+Given the troff name of a special character, this routine finds its
+definition and copies it to the MPX file.  It also finds the name of
+the vardef macro and returns that name. The name should be C.<something>.
+
+@ 
+TH: A bit of trickery is added here for case-insensitive 
+file systems. This aliasing allows the CHARLIB directory
+to exist on DVDs, for example.
+It is a hack, I know. I've stuck to  names on TeXLive.
+
+@d test_redo_search do {
+   if (deff==NULL)
+	 deff = mpx_fsearch(mpx, cname, mpx_specchar_format);
+ } while (0)
+
+@c
+static char *mpx_copy_spec_char(MPX mpx, char *cname) {
+  FILE *deff;
+  int c;
+  char *s, *t;
+  char specintro[] = "vardef ";	/* MetaPost name follows this */
+  unsigned k = 0;			/* how much of specintro so far */
+  if (strcmp(cname, "ao") == 0) {
+	deff = mpx_fsearch(mpx, "ao.x", mpx_specchar_format);
+	test_redo_search;
+  } else if (strcmp(cname, "lh") == 0) {
+	deff = mpx_fsearch(mpx, "lh.x", mpx_specchar_format);
+	test_redo_search;
+  } else if (strcmp(cname, "~=") == 0) {
+	deff = mpx_fsearch(mpx, "twiddle", mpx_specchar_format);
+	test_redo_search;
+  } else {
+	deff = mpx_fsearch(mpx, cname, mpx_specchar_format);
+  }
+  if (deff==NULL)
+     mpx_abort(mpx, "No vardef in charlib/%s", cname);
+
+  while (k < (unsigned)strlen(specintro)) {
+	if ((c = getc(deff)) == EOF)
+	    mpx_abort(mpx, "No vardef in charlib/%s", cname);
+	putc(c, mpx->mpxfile);
+	if (c == specintro[k])
+	  k++;
+	else
+	  k = 0;
+  }
+  s = xmalloc(mpx->bufsize,1);
+  t = s ;
+  while ((c = getc(deff)) != '(') {
+	if (c == EOF)
+	  mpx_abort(mpx, "vardef in charlib/%s has no arguments", cname);
+	putc(c, mpx->mpxfile);
+	*t++ = c;
+  }
+  putc(c, mpx->mpxfile);
+  *t++ = '\0';
+  while ((c = getc(deff)) != EOF);
+    putc(c, mpx->mpxfile);
+  return s;
+}
+
+
+@ When given a character name instead of a number, we need to check if
+it is a special character and download the definition if necessary.
+If the character is not in the current font we have to search the special
+fonts.
+
+@<Globals@>=
+avl_tree spec_tab;
+
+@ The |spec_tab| avl table combines character names with macro names. 
+
+@<Types...@>=
+typedef struct {
+    char *name;
+    char *mac;
+} spec_entry;
+
+@ @c 
+static void mpx_set_char(MPX mpx, char *cname) {
+  int f, c;
+  avl_entry tmp, *p;
+  spec_entry *sp;
+
+  if (*cname == ' ' || *cname == '\t')
+	return;
+  f = (int)mpx->curfont;
+  tmp.name = cname;
+  p = avl_find(&tmp, mpx->charcodes[f]);
+  if (p==NULL) {
+	for (f = mpx->specfnt; f != (max_fnums+1); f = mpx->next_specfnt[f]) {
+        p = avl_find(&tmp, mpx->charcodes[f]);
+	    if (p!=NULL)
+		  goto OUT_LABEL;
+	}
+	mpx_abort(mpx, "There is no character %s", cname);
+  }
+OUT_LABEL:
+  c = p->num;
+  if (!is_specchar(c)) {
+	mpx_set_num_char(mpx, f, c);
+  } else {
+	if (mpx->str_f >= 0)
+	    mpx_finish_last_char(mpx);
+	if (!mpx->fonts_used)
+	    mpx_prepare_font_use(mpx);
+	if (!mpx->font_used[f])
+	    mpx_first_use(mpx, f);
+	if (mpx->spec_tab)
+       mpx->spec_tab = mpx_avl_create (mpx);
+    sp = xmalloc(sizeof(spec_entry),1);
+    sp->name = cname;
+    sp->mac = NULL;
+    {
+      spec_entry *r  = (spec_entry *)avl_find(sp, mpx->spec_tab);
+      if (r==NULL) {
+        if (avl_ins (sp, mpx->spec_tab, avl_false)<0)
+          mpx_abort(mpx,"Memory allocation failure");
+      }
+    }
+	if (sp->mac == NULL) {
+      sp->mac = mpx_copy_spec_char(mpx, cname);	/* this won't be NULL */
+    }
+	fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, "_s(%s(_n%d)", sp->mac,f);
+	fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, ",%.5f,%.4f,%.4f)",
+		(mpx->cursize/mpx->font_design_size[f])*1.00375, 
+         (double)((mpx->h*mpx->unit)/100.0), YCORR-mpx->v*mpx->unit);
+	mpx_slant_and_ht(mpx);
+	fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, ";\n");
+  }
+}
+
+@ Font Definitions
+
+Mount the font with troff name nam at external font number n and read any
+necessary font files.
+
+@c
+static void mpx_do_font_def(MPX mpx, int n, char *nam) {
+  int f;
+  unsigned k;
+  avl_entry tmp, *p;
+  tmp.name = nam;
+  p = (avl_entry *) avl_find (&tmp, mpx->trfonts);
+  if (p==NULL)
+    mpx_abort(mpx, "Font %s was not in map file", nam);
+  f = p->num;
+  if ( mpx->charcodes[f] == NULL) {
+    mpx_read_fontdesc(mpx, nam);
+    mpx->cur_name = xstrdup(mpx->font_name[f]);
+    if (! mpx_open_tfm_file(mpx) )
+      font_abort("No TFM file found for ",f);
+@.no TFM file found@>
+    mpx_in_TFM(mpx, f);
+  }
+  for (k = 0; k < mpx->nfonts; k++)
+	if (mpx->font_num[k] == n)
+	    mpx->font_num[k] = -1;
+  mpx->font_num[f] = n;
+  @<Do any other initialization required for the new font |f|@>;
+}
+
+
+
+@ Time on `makepath pencircle'
+
+Given the control points of a cubic Bernstein polynomial, evaluate it at t.
+
+@d Speed	((float) (PI/4.0))
+
+@c
+static float mpx_b_eval(const float *xx, float t) {
+    float zz[4];
+    register int i, j;
+    for (i = 0; i <= 3; i++)
+	zz[i] = xx[i];
+    for (i = 3; i > 0; i--)
+	for (j = 0; j < i; j++)
+	    zz[j] += t * (zz[j + 1] - zz[j]);
+    return zz[0];
+}
+
+
+@ Find the direction angle at time t on the path `makepath pencircle'.
+The tables below give the Bezier control points for MetaPost's cubic
+approximation to the first octant of a unit circle.
+
+@c
+static const float xx[] = { 1.0, 1.0, 0.8946431597,  0.7071067812 };
+static const float yy[] = { 0.0, 0.2652164899, 0.5195704026, 0.7071067812 };
+
+@ @c
+static float mpx_circangle(float t) {
+    float ti;
+    ti = floor(t);
+    t -= ti;
+    return (float) atan(mpx_b_eval(yy, t) / 
+                        mpx_b_eval(xx, t)) + ti * Speed;
+}
+
+
+@ Find the spline parameter where `makepath pencircle' comes closest to
+   (cos(a)/2,sin(a)/2).
+
+@c
+static float mpx_circtime(float a) {
+    int i;
+    float t;
+    t = a / Speed;
+    for (i = 2; --i >= 0;)
+	t += (a - mpx_circangle(t)) / Speed;
+    return t;
+}
+
+
+
+@ Troff Graphics
+
+@<Globals@>=
+float gx;
+float gy;			/* current point for graphics (init. (h,YCORR/mpx->unit-v) */
+
+@ @c 
+static void mpx_prepare_graphics(MPX mpx) {
+
+  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, "vardef _D(expr _d)expr _q =\n");
+  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,
+    " addto _p doublepath _q withpen pencircle scaled _d; enddef;\n");
+  mpx->graphics_used = true;
+}
+
+
+@ This function prints the current position (gx,gy).  Then if it can read dh dv
+from string s, it increments (gx,gy) and prints "--".  By returning the rest
+of the string s or NULL if nothing could be read from s, it provides the
+argument for the next iteration.
+
+@c 
+static char *mpx_do_line(MPX mpx, char *s) {
+  float dh, dv;
+
+  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, "(%.3f,%.3f)", mpx->gx * mpx->unit, mpx->gy * mpx->unit);
+  dh = mpx_get_float(mpx, s);
+  dv = mpx_get_float(mpx, mpx->arg_tail);
+  if (mpx->arg_tail == NULL)
+    return NULL;
+  mpx->gx += dh;
+  mpx->gy -= dv;
+  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, "--\n");
+  return mpx->arg_tail;
+}
+
+
+@ Function |spline_seg()| reads two pairs of (dh,dv) increments and prints the
+corresponding quadratic B-spline segment, leaving the ending point to be
+printed next time.  The return value is the string with the first (dh,dv)
+pair lopped off.  If only one pair of increments is found, we prepare to
+terminate the iteration by printing last time's ending point and returning
+NULL.
+
+@c 
+static char * mpx_spline_seg(MPX mpx, char *s) {
+  float dh1, dv1, dh2, dv2;
+
+  dh1 = mpx_get_float(mpx, s);
+  dv1 = mpx_get_float(mpx, mpx->arg_tail);
+  if (mpx->arg_tail == NULL)
+	mpx_abort(mpx, "Missing spline increments");
+  s = mpx->arg_tail;
+  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, "(%.3f,%.3f)", (mpx->gx + .5 * dh1) * mpx->unit,
+	    (mpx->gy - .5 * dv1) * mpx->unit);
+  mpx->gx += dh1;
+  mpx->gy -= dv1;
+  dh2 = mpx_get_float(mpx, s);
+  dv2 = mpx_get_float(mpx, mpx->arg_tail);
+  if (mpx->arg_tail == NULL)
+	return NULL;
+  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, "..\ncontrols (%.3f,%.3f) and (%.3f,%.3f)..\n",
+	    (mpx->gx - dh1 / 6.0) * mpx->unit, (mpx->gy + dv1 / 6.0) * mpx->unit,
+	    (mpx->gx + dh2 / 6.0) * mpx->unit, (mpx->gy - dv2 / 6.0) * mpx->unit);
+  return s;
+}
+
+
+@ Draw an ellipse with the given major and minor axes.
+
+@c 
+static void mpx_do_ellipse(MPX mpx, float a, float b) {
+
+  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, "makepath(pencircle xscaled %.3f\n yscaled %.3f",
+	    a * mpx->unit, b * mpx->unit);
+  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, " shifted (%.3f,%.3f));\n", (mpx->gx + .5 * a) * mpx->unit,
+	    mpx->gy * mpx->unit);
+  mpx->gx += a;
+}
+
+
+@ Draw a counter-clockwise arc centered at (cx,cy) with initial and final radii
+   (ax,ay) and (bx,by) respectively.
+
+@c 
+static 
+void mpx_do_arc(MPX mpx, float cx, float cy, float ax, float ay, float bx, float by) {
+  float t1, t2;
+
+  t1 = mpx_circtime(atan2(ay, ax));
+  t2 = mpx_circtime(atan2(by, bx));
+  if (t2 < t1)
+	t2 += 8.0;
+  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, "subpath (%.5f,%.5f) of\n", t1, t2);
+  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile,
+	    " makepath(pencircle scaled %.3f shifted (%.3f,%.3f));\n",
+	    2.0 * sqrt(ax * ax + ay * ay) * mpx->unit, cx * mpx->unit, cy * mpx->unit);
+  mpx->gx = cx + bx;
+  mpx->gy = cy + by;
+}
+
+
+
+@ String s is everything following the initial `D' in a troff graphics command.
+
+@c 
+static void mpx_do_graphic(MPX mpx, char *s) {
+  float h1, v1, h2, v2;
+
+  mpx_finish_last_char(mpx);
+  /* GROFF uses Fd to set fill color for solid drawing objects to the
+     default, so just ignore that.
+   */
+  if (s[0] == 'F' && s[1] == 'd')
+	return;
+  mpx->gx = (float) mpx->h;
+  mpx->gy = YCORR / mpx->unit - ((float) mpx->v);
+  if (!mpx->graphics_used)
+	mpx_prepare_graphics(mpx);
+  fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, "D(%.4f) ", LWscale * mpx->cursize);
+  switch (*s++) {
+  case 'c':
+	h1 = mpx_get_float(mpx,s);
+	if (mpx->arg_tail == NULL)
+	    mpx_abort(mpx,"Bad argument in %s", s-2);
+	mpx_do_ellipse(mpx,h1, h1);
+	break;
+  case 'e':
+	h1 = mpx_get_float(mpx,s);
+	v1 = mpx_get_float(mpx,mpx->arg_tail);
+	if (mpx->arg_tail == NULL)
+	    mpx_abort(mpx,"Bad argument in %s", s - 2);
+	mpx_do_ellipse(mpx,h1, v1);
+	break;
+  case 'A':
+	fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, "reverse ");
+	/* fall through */
+  case 'a':
+	h1 = mpx_get_float(mpx,s);
+	v1 = mpx_get_float(mpx,mpx->arg_tail);
+	h2 = mpx_get_float(mpx,mpx->arg_tail);
+	v2 = mpx_get_float(mpx,mpx->arg_tail);
+	if (mpx->arg_tail == NULL)
+	    mpx_abort(mpx,"Bad argument in %s", s - 2);
+	mpx_do_arc(mpx,mpx->gx + h1, mpx->gy - v1, -h1, v1, h2, -v2);
+	break;
+  case 'l':
+  case 'p':
+	while (s != NULL)
+	    s = mpx_do_line(mpx,s);
+	fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, ";\n");
+	break;
+  case 'q':
+	do
+      s = mpx_spline_seg(mpx,s);
+	while (s != NULL);
+	fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, ";\n");
+	break;
+  case '~':
+	fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, "(%.3f,%.3f)--", mpx->gx * mpx->unit, mpx->gy * mpx->unit);
+	do
+	    s = mpx_spline_seg(mpx,s);
+	while (s != NULL);
+	fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, "--(%.3f,%.3f);\n", mpx->gx * mpx->unit, mpx->gy * mpx->unit);
+    break;
+  default:
+	mpx_abort(mpx,"Unknown drawing function %s", s - 2);
+  }
+  mpx->h = (int) floor(mpx->gx + .5);
+  mpx->v = (int) floor(YCORR / mpx->unit + .5 - mpx->gy);
+}
+
+
+
+@ Interpreting Troff Output
+
+@c
+static void mpx_change_font(MPX mpx, int f) {
+    for (mpx->curfont = 0; mpx->curfont < mpx->nfonts; mpx->curfont++)
+	if (mpx->font_num[mpx->curfont] == f)
+	    return;
+    mpx_abort(mpx,"Bad font setting");
+}
+
+
+@ String s0 is everything following the initial `x' in a troff device control
+   command.  A zero result indicates a stop command.
+
+@c
+static int mpx_do_x_cmd(MPX mpx, char *s0)
+{
+    float x;
+    int n;
+    char *s;
+
+    s = s0;
+    while (*s == ' ' || *s == '\t')
+	s++;
+    switch (*s++) {
+    case 'r':
+	if (mpx->unit != 0.0)
+	    mpx_abort(mpx,"Attempt to reset resolution");
+	while (*s != ' ' && *s != '\t')
+	    s++;
+	mpx->unit = mpx_get_float(mpx,s);
+	if (mpx->unit <= 0.0)
+	    mpx_abort(mpx,"Bad resolution: x %s", s0);
+	mpx->unit = 72.0 / mpx->unit;
+	break;
+    case 'f':
+	while (*s != ' ' && *s != '\t')
+	    s++;
+	n = mpx_get_int(mpx,s);
+	if (mpx->arg_tail == NULL)
+	    mpx_abort(mpx,"Bad font def: x %s", s0);
+	s = mpx->arg_tail;
+	while (*s == ' ' || *s == '\t')
+	    s++;
+	mpx_do_font_def(mpx,n, s);
+	break;
+    case 's':
+	return 0;
+    case 'H':
+	while (*s != ' ' && *s != '\t')
+	    s++;
+	mpx->Xheight = mpx_get_float(mpx,s);
+	/* GROFF troff output is scaled |groff_out(5)|: 
+       The argument to the s command is in scaled
+	   points (units of points/n, where n is the argument
+	   to the sizescale command  in the DESC file.)  The
+	   argument to the x Height command is also in scaled points.
+	   sizescale for groff devps is 1000
+	 */
+	if (mpx->sizescale != 0.0) {
+	    if (mpx->unit != 0.0)
+		mpx->Xheight *= mpx->unit;	/* ??? */
+	    else
+		mpx->Xheight /= mpx->sizescale;
+	}
+	if (mpx->Xheight == mpx->cursize)
+	    mpx->Xheight = 0.0;
+	break;
+    case 'S':
+	while (*s != ' ' && *s != '\t')
+	    s++;
+	mpx->Xslant = mpx_get_float(mpx,s) * (PI / 180.0);
+	x = cos(mpx->Xslant);
+	if (-1e-4 < x && x < 1e-4)
+	    mpx_abort(mpx,"Excessive slant");
+	mpx->Xslant = sin(mpx->Xslant) / x;
+	break;
+    default:
+	/* do nothing */ ;
+    }
+    return 1;
+}
+
+
+@ This routine reads commands from the troff output file up to and including
+the next `p' or `x s' command.  It also calls |set_num_char()| and |set_char()|
+to generate output when appropriate.  A zero result indicates that there
+are no more pages to do.
+
+GROFF:
+GNU groff uses an extended device-independent output file format
+documented in |groff_out(5)|. In order to allow parsing of groff's
+output files, this function either needs to be extended to support
+the new command codes, or else the use of the "t" and "u" commands
+must be disabled by removing the line "tcommand" from the DESC file
+in the \$(prefix)/lib/groff/devps directory.
+
+@c
+static int mpx_do_page (MPX mpx, FILE *trf) {
+    char *buf;
+    char a, *c, *cc;
+
+    mpx->h = mpx->v = 0;
+    while ((buf = mpx_getline(mpx, trf)) != NULL) {
+	mpx->lnno++;
+	c = buf;
+	while (*c != '\0') {
+	    switch (*c) {
+	    case ' ':
+	    case '\t':
+	    case 'w':
+		c++;
+		break;
+	    case 's':
+		mpx->cursize = mpx_get_float(mpx,c + 1);
+		/* GROFF troff output is scaled
+		   |groff_out(5)|: The argument to the s command is in scaled
+		   points (units of points/n, where n is the argument
+		   to the sizescale command  in the DESC file.)  The
+		   argument to the x Height command is also in scaled
+		   points.
+		   sizescale for groff devps is 1000
+		 */
+		if (mpx->sizescale != 0.0) {
+		    if (mpx->unit != 0.0)
+			mpx->cursize *= mpx->unit;	/* ??? */
+		    else
+			mpx->cursize /= mpx->sizescale;
+		}
+		goto iarg;
+	    case 'f':
+		mpx_change_font(mpx, mpx_get_int(mpx,c + 1));
+		goto iarg;
+	    case 'c':
+		if (c[1] == '\0')
+		    mpx_abort(mpx, "Bad c command in troff output");
+		cc = c + 2;
+		goto set;
+	    case 'C':
+		cc = c;
+		do
+		    cc++;
+		while (*cc != ' ' && *cc != '\t' && *cc != '\0');
+		goto set;
+	    case 'N':
+		mpx_set_num_char(mpx, (int)mpx->curfont, mpx_get_int(mpx,c + 1));
+		goto iarg;
+	    case 'H':
+		 mpx->h = mpx_get_int(mpx, c + 1);
+		goto iarg;
+	    case 'V':
+		 mpx->v = mpx_get_int(mpx, c + 1);
+		goto iarg;
+	    case 'h':
+		 mpx->h += mpx_get_int(mpx, c + 1);
+		goto iarg;
+	    case 'v':
+		 mpx->v += mpx_get_int(mpx, c + 1);
+		goto iarg;
+	    case '0':
+	    case '1':
+	    case '2':
+	    case '3':
+	    case '4':
+	    case '5':
+	    case '6':
+	    case '7':
+	    case '8':
+	    case '9':
+		if (c[1] < '0' || c[1] > '9' || c[2] == '\0')
+		    mpx_abort(mpx, "Bad nnc command in troff output");
+		 mpx->h += 10 * (c[0] - '0') + c[1] - '0';
+		c++;
+		cc = c + 2;
+		goto set;
+	    case 'p':
+		return 1;
+	    case 'n':
+		(void) mpx_get_int(mpx, c + 1);
+		(void) mpx_get_int(mpx, mpx->arg_tail);
+		goto iarg;
+	    case 'D':
+		mpx_do_graphic(mpx, c + 1);
+		goto eoln;
+	    case 'x':
+		if (!mpx_do_x_cmd(mpx, c + 1))
+		    return 0;
+		goto eoln;
+	    case '#':
+		goto eoln;
+	    case 'F':
+		/* GROFF uses this command to report filename */
+		goto eoln;
+	    case 'm':
+		/* GROFF uses this command to control color */
+		goto eoln;
+	    case 'u':
+		/* GROFF uses this command to output a word with additional
+		   white space between characters, not implemented
+		 */
+		mpx_abort(mpx, "Bad command in troff output\n"
+		     "change the DESC file for your GROFF PostScript device, remove tcommand");
+	    case 't':
+		/* GROFF uses this command to output a word */
+		cc = c;
+		do
+		    cc++;
+		while (*cc != ' ' && *cc != '\t' && *cc != '\0');
+		a = *cc;
+		*cc = '\0';
+		mpx_set_string(mpx, ++c);
+		c = cc;
+		*c = a;
+		continue;
+	    default:
+		mpx_abort(mpx, "Bad command in troff output");
+	    }
+	    continue;
+	  set:
+        a = *cc;
+	    *cc = '\0';
+	    mpx_set_char(mpx, ++c);
+	    c = cc;
+	    *c = a;
+	    continue;
+	  iarg:
+        c = mpx->arg_tail;
+	}
+      eoln:			/* do nothing */ ;
+    }
+    return 0;
+}
+
+
+@ Main Dmp Program
+
+@d dbname "trfonts.map"	/* file for table of troff \& TFM font names */
+@d adjname "trchars.adj" /* file for character shift amounts */
+
+@c
+static int mpx_dmp(MPX mpx, char *infile) {
+    int more;
+    FILE *trf = mpx_xfopen(mpx,infile, "r");
+    mpx_read_desc(mpx);
+    mpx_read_fmap(mpx,dbname);
+    if (!mpx->gflag)
+	  mpx_read_char_adj(mpx,adjname);
+    mpx_open_mpxfile(mpx);
+    if (mpx->banner != NULL)
+      fprintf (mpx->mpxfile,"%s\n",mpx->banner);
+    if (mpx_do_page(mpx, trf)) {
+	  do {
+        @<Do initialization required before starting a new page@>;
+	    mpx_start_picture(mpx);
+	    more = mpx_do_page(mpx,trf);
+	    mpx_stop_picture(mpx);
+	    fprintf(mpx->mpxfile, "mpxbreak\n");
+	  } while (more);
+    }
+    mpx_fclose(mpx,trf);
+    if ( mpx->history<=mpx_cksum_trouble )
+      return 0;
+    else 
+      return mpx->history;
+}
+
+
+@* \[5] Makempx.
+
+
+Make an MPX file from the labels in a MetaPost source file,
+using mpto and either dvitomp (TeX) or dmp (troff).
+
+Started from a shell script initially based on John Hobby's original
+version, that was then translated to C by Akira Kakuto (Aug 1997, 
+Aug 2001), and updated and largely rewritten by Taco Hoekwater (Nov 2006).
+
+
+Differences between the script and this C version:
+
+The script trapped HUP, INT, QUIT and TERM for cleaning up 
+temporary files. This is a refinement, and not portable.
+
+The script put its own directory in front of the
+executable search PATH. This is not portable either, and
+it seems a safe bet that normal users do not have 'mpto', 
+'dvitomp', or 'dmp' commands in their path.  
+
+The command-line '-troff' now also accepts an optional argument.
+
+The troff infile for error diagnostics is renamed "mpxerr.i", 
+not plain "mpxerr".
+
+The original script deleted mpx*.* in the cleanup process. 
+
+That is a bit harder in C, because it requires reading the contents 
+of the current directory.  The current program assumes that 
+opendir(), readdir() and closedir() are known everywhere where 
+the function getcwd() exists (except on WIN32, where it uses
+|_findfirst| \& co).
+
+If this assumption is false, you can define |NO_GETCWD|, and makempx
+will revert to trying to delete only a few known extensions
+
+There is a -debug switch, preventing the removal of tmp files
+
+@d TMPNAME_EXT(a,b) { strcpy(a,tmpname); strcat(a,b); }
+
+@c
+
+#define TEXERR "mpxerr.tex"
+#define DVIERR "mpxerr.dvi"
+#define TROFF_INERR "mpxerr.i"
+#define TROFF_OUTERR "mpxerr.t"
+
+@ @c 
+static void mpx_rename (MPX mpx, const char *a, const char *b) {
+  mpx_report(mpx,"renaming %s to %s",a,b); 
+  rename(a,b); 
+}
+
+@ @<Globals@>=
+char tex[15] ;
+int debug ;
+const char *progname;
+
+@ Cleaning up
+@c
+static void  mpx_default_erasetmp(MPX mpx) {
+    char *wrk;
+    char *p;
+    if (mpx->mode==mpx_tex_mode) {
+      wrk = xstrdup(mpx->tex);
+      p = strrchr(wrk, '.');
+      *p = '\0';  strcat(wrk, ".aux");   remove(wrk);
+      *p = '\0';  strcat(wrk, ".pdf");   remove(wrk);
+      *p = '\0';  strcat(wrk, ".toc");   remove(wrk);
+      *p = '\0';  strcat(wrk, ".idx");   remove(wrk);
+      *p = '\0';  strcat(wrk, ".ent");   remove(wrk);
+      *p = '\0';  strcat(wrk, ".out");   remove(wrk);
+      *p = '\0';  strcat(wrk, ".nav");   remove(wrk);
+      *p = '\0';  strcat(wrk, ".snm");   remove(wrk);
+      *p = '\0';  strcat(wrk, ".tui");   remove(wrk);
+      free(wrk);
+    }
+}
+
+@ @<Declarations@>=
+static void mpx_erasetmp(MPX mpx);
+
+@ @c
+static void mpx_cleandir(MPX mpx, char *cur_path) {
+  char *wrk, *p;
+#ifdef _WIN32
+  struct _finddata_t c_file;
+  long hFile;
+#else
+  struct dirent *entry;
+  DIR *d;
+#endif
+  wrk = xstrdup(mpx->tex);
+  p = strrchr(wrk, '.');
+  *p = '\0'; /* now wrk is identical to tmpname */ 
+
+#ifdef _WIN32
+  strcat(cur_path,"/*");
+  if ((hFile = _findfirst (cur_path, &c_file)) == -1L) {
+    mpx_default_erasetmp(mpx);
+  } else {
+    if (strstr(c_file.name,wrk)==c_file.name) 
+	  remove(c_file.name);
+	while (_findnext (hFile, &c_file) != -1L) {
+	  if (strstr(c_file.name,wrk)==c_file.name) 
+	    remove(c_file.name);
+	}
+	_findclose (hFile); /* no more entries => close directory */
+  }
+#else
+  if ((d = opendir(cur_path)) == NULL) {
+	mpx_default_erasetmp(mpx);
+  } else {
+	while ((entry = readdir (d)) != NULL) {
+      if (strstr(entry->d_name,wrk)==entry->d_name) 
+	    remove(entry->d_name);
+	}
+    closedir(d);
+  }
+#endif	    
+  free(wrk);
+}
+
+
+@ It is important that |mpx_erasetmp| remains silent.
+If it find trouble, it should just ignore it.
+
+The string |cur_path| is a little bit larger than needed, because that 
+allows the win32 code in |cleandir| to add the slash and asterisk for 
+globbing without having to reallocate the variable first.
+
+@c
+#ifdef WIN32
+#define GETCWD _getcwd
+#else
+#define GETCWD getcwd
+#endif
+static void mpx_erasetmp(MPX mpx) {
+  char cur_path[1024];
+  if (mpx->debug)
+	return;
+  if (mpx->tex[0] != '\0') {
+    remove(mpx->tex);
+    if(GETCWD(cur_path,1020) == NULL) {
+      mpx_default_erasetmp(mpx); /* don't know where we are */
+    } else {
+      mpx_cleandir(mpx,cur_path);
+    }
+  }
+}
+
+
+@* Running the external typesetters.
+
+First, here is a helper for messaging.
+
+@c
+static char *mpx_print_command (MPX mpx, int cmdlength, char **cmdline) {
+  char *s, *t;
+  int i,l;
+  (void)mpx;
+  l = 0;
+  for (i = 0; i < cmdlength ; i++) {
+     l += strlen(cmdline[i])+1;
+  }
+  s = xmalloc((size_t)l,1); t=s;
+  for (i = 0; i < cmdlength ; i++) {
+    if (i>0) *t++ = ' ';
+    t = strcpy(t,cmdline[i]);
+    t += strlen(cmdline[i]);
+  }
+  return s;
+}
+
+@ This function unifies the external program calling across Posix-like and Win32
+systems.
+
+@c
+static int do_spawn (MPX mpx, char *icmd, char **options) {
+#ifndef WIN32
+  pid_t child;
+#endif
+  int retcode = -1;
+  char * cmd = xmalloc(strlen(icmd)+1,1);
+  if (icmd[0] != '"') {
+    strcpy(cmd,icmd);
+  } else {
+    strncpy(cmd,icmd+1,strlen(icmd)-2);
+    cmd[strlen(icmd)-2] = 0;
+  }
+#ifndef WIN32
+  child = fork();
+  if (child < 0) 
+    mpx_abort(mpx, "fork failed: %s", strerror(errno));
+  if (child == 0) {
+    if(execvp(cmd, options))
+      mpx_abort(mpx, "exec failed: %s", strerror(errno));
+  } else {
+    if (wait(&retcode)==child) {
+      retcode = (WIFEXITED(retcode) ? WEXITSTATUS(retcode) : -1);
+    } else {
+      mpx_abort(mpx, "wait failed: %s", strerror(errno));
+    }  
+  }
+#else
+  retcode = spawnvp(P_WAIT, cmd, (const char **)options);
+#endif
+  xfree(cmd);
+  return retcode;
+}
+
+@ @c
+#ifdef WIN32
+#define nuldev "nul"
+#else
+#define nuldev "/dev/null"
+#endif
+static int mpx_run_command(MPX mpx, char *inname, char *outname, int count, char **cmdl) {
+    char *s;
+    int retcode;
+    int sav_o, sav_i; /* for I/O redirection */
+    FILE *fr, *fw;    /* read and write streams for the command */
+
+    if (count < 1 || cmdl == NULL || cmdl[0] == NULL)
+	  return -1; /* return non-zero by default, signalling an error */
+     
+    s = mpx_print_command(mpx,count, cmdl);
+    mpx_report(mpx,"running command %s", s);
+    free(s);
+    
+    fr = mpx_xfopen(mpx,(inname ? inname : nuldev), "r");
+    fw = mpx_xfopen(mpx,(outname ? outname : nuldev), "wb");
+    @<Save and redirect the standard I/O@>;
+    retcode = do_spawn(mpx,cmdl[0], cmdl);
+    @<Restore the standard I/O@>;
+    mpx_fclose(mpx,fr);
+    mpx_fclose(mpx,fw);
+    return retcode;
+}
+
+@ @ Running Troff is more likely than not a series of pipes that 
+feed input to each other. Makempx does all of this itself by using
+temporary files inbetween. That means we have to juggle about with
+|stdin| and |stdout|.
+
+This is the only non-ansi C bit of makempx.
+@^system dependencies@>
+
+@<Save and redirect the standard I/O@>=
+#ifdef WIN32
+#define DUP _dup
+#define DUPP _dup2
+#else
+#define DUP dup
+#define DUPP dup2
+#endif
+sav_i = DUP(fileno(stdin));
+sav_o = DUP(fileno(stdout));
+DUPP(fileno(fr), fileno(stdin));
+DUPP(fileno(fw), fileno(stdout))
+
+@ @<Restore the standard I/O@>=
+DUPP(sav_i, fileno(stdin));
+close(sav_i);
+DUPP(sav_o, fileno(stdout));
+close(sav_o)
+
+@ The allocation of the array pointed to by |cmdline_addr| is of
+course much larger than is really needed, but it will still only be a
+few hunderd bytes at the most, and this ensures that the separate
+parts of the |maincmd| will all fit.
+
+@d split_command(a,b) mpx_do_split_command(mpx,a,&b,' ')
+@d split_pipes(a,b)   mpx_do_split_command(mpx,a,&b,'|')
+
+@c
+static int
+mpx_do_split_command(MPX mpx, char *maincmd, char ***cmdline_addr, char target) {
+  char *piece;
+  char *cmd;
+  char **cmdline;
+  size_t i;
+  int ret = 0;
+  int in_string = 0;
+  if (strlen(maincmd) == 0)
+    return 0;
+  i = sizeof(char *)*(strlen(maincmd)+1);
+  cmdline = xmalloc(i,1);
+  memset(cmdline,0,i);
+  *cmdline_addr = cmdline;
+
+  i = 0;
+  while (maincmd[i] == ' ')
+	i++;
+  cmd = xstrdup(maincmd);
+  piece = cmd;
+  for (; i <= strlen(maincmd); i++) {
+    if (in_string == 1) {
+	  if (cmd[i] == '"') {
+	    in_string = 0;
+	  }
+	} else if (in_string == 2) {
+	  if (cmd[i] == '\'') {
+		in_string = 0;
+	  }
+	} else {
+	  if (cmd[i] == '"') {
+		in_string = 1;
+	  } else if (cmd[i] == '\'') {
+		in_string = 2;
+	  } else if (cmd[i] == target) {
+		cmd[i] = 0;
+		cmdline[ret++] = piece;
+		while (i < strlen(maincmd) && cmd[(i + 1)] == ' ')
+		    i++;
+		piece = cmd + i + 1;
+	  }
+	}
+  }
+  if (*piece) {
+	cmdline[ret++] = piece;
+  }
+  return ret;
+}
+
+@ @<Globals@>=
+char *maincmd;    /* TeX command name */
+
+@ @c
+static void mpx_command_cleanup (MPX mpx, char **cmdline) {
+  (void)mpx;
+  xfree(cmdline[0]);
+  xfree(cmdline);
+}
+
+
+
+@ @c
+static void mpx_command_error (MPX mpx, int cmdlength, char **cmdline) {
+  char *s = mpx_print_command(mpx, cmdlength, cmdline);
+  mpx_command_cleanup(mpx, cmdline);
+  mpx_abort(mpx, "Command failed: %s; see mpxerr.log", s);
+}
+
+
+
+@ @(mpxout.h@>=
+typedef struct mpx_options {
+  int mode;
+  char *cmd;
+  char *mptexpre;
+  char *mpname;
+  char *mpxname;
+  char *banner;
+  int debug;
+  mpx_file_finder find_file;
+} mpx_options;
+int mpx_makempx (mpx_options *mpxopt) ;
+int mpx_run_dvitomp (mpx_options *mpxopt) ;
+
+ 
+@ 
+
+@d ERRLOG "mpxerr.log"
+@d MPXLOG "makempx.log"
+
+@c
+int mpx_makempx (mpx_options *mpxopt) {
+    MPX mpx;
+    char **cmdline, **cmdbits;
+    char infile[15];
+    int retcode, i ;
+    char tmpname[] = "mpXXXXXX";
+    int cmdlength = 1;
+    int cmdbitlength = 1;
+    if (!mpxopt->debug) {
+      @<Check if mp file is newer than mpxfile, exit if not@>;
+    }
+    mpx = malloc(sizeof(struct mpx_data));
+    if (mpx==NULL || mpxopt->cmd==NULL || mpxopt->mpname==NULL || mpxopt->mpxname==NULL)
+      return mpx_fatal_error;
+    mpx_initialize(mpx);
+    if (mpxopt->banner!=NULL)
+      mpx->banner = mpxopt->banner;
+    mpx->mode = mpxopt->mode;
+    mpx->debug = mpxopt->debug;
+    if (mpxopt->find_file!=NULL)
+      mpx->find_file = mpxopt->find_file;
+    if (mpxopt->cmd!=NULL)
+      mpx->maincmd = xstrdup(mpxopt->cmd); /* valgrind says this leaks */
+    mpx->mpname = xstrdup(mpxopt->mpname);
+    mpx->mpxname = xstrdup(mpxopt->mpxname);
+    @<Install and test the non-local jump buffer@>;
+
+    if (mpx->debug) {
+      mpx->errfile = stderr;
+    } else {
+      mpx->errfile = mpx_xfopen(mpx,MPXLOG, "wb");
+    }
+    mpx->progname = "makempx";
+    @<Initialize the |tmpname| variable@>;
+    if (mpxopt->mptexpre == NULL)
+      mpxopt->mptexpre = xstrdup("mptexpre.tex");
+    @<Run |mpto| on the mp file@>;
+    if (mpxopt->cmd==NULL)
+      goto DONE;
+    if (mpx->mode == mpx_tex_mode) {
+      @<Run |TeX| and set up |infile| or abort@>;
+      if (mpx_dvitomp(mpx, infile)) {
+	    mpx_rename(mpx, infile,DVIERR);
+	    if (!mpx->debug)
+	      remove(mpx->mpxname);
+	    mpx_abort(mpx, "Dvi conversion failed: %s %s\n",
+	                    DVIERR, mpx->mpxname);
+      }
+    } else if (mpx->mode == mpx_troff_mode) {
+      @<Run |Troff| and set up |infile| or abort@>;
+      if (mpx_dmp(mpx, infile)) {
+	    mpx_rename(mpx,infile, TROFF_OUTERR);
+        mpx_rename(mpx,mpx->tex, TROFF_INERR);
+	    if (!mpx->debug)
+	      remove(mpx->mpxname);
+	    mpx_abort(mpx, "Troff conversion failed: %s %s\n",
+	                    TROFF_OUTERR, mpx->mpxname);
+      }
+    }
+    mpx_fclose(mpx,mpx->mpxfile);
+    if (!mpx->debug)
+      mpx_fclose(mpx,mpx->errfile);
+    if (!mpx->debug) {
+	  remove(MPXLOG);
+	  remove(ERRLOG);
+   	  remove(infile);
+    }
+    mpx_erasetmp(mpx);
+  DONE:
+    retcode = mpx->history;
+    mpx_xfree(mpx->buf);
+    mpx_xfree(mpx->maincmd);
+    for (i = 0; i < (int)mpx->nfonts; i++)
+      mpx_xfree(mpx->font_name[i]);
+    free(mpx);
+    if (retcode == mpx_cksum_trouble)
+       retcode = 0;
+    return retcode;
+}
+int mpx_run_dvitomp (mpx_options *mpxopt) {
+    MPX mpx;
+    int retcode, i ;
+    mpx = malloc(sizeof(struct mpx_data));
+    if (mpx==NULL || mpxopt->mpname==NULL || mpxopt->mpxname==NULL)
+      return mpx_fatal_error;
+    mpx_initialize(mpx);
+    if (mpxopt->banner!=NULL)
+      mpx->banner = mpxopt->banner;
+    mpx->mode = mpxopt->mode;
+    mpx->debug = mpxopt->debug;
+    if (mpxopt->find_file!=NULL)
+      mpx->find_file = mpxopt->find_file;
+    mpx->mpname = xstrdup(mpxopt->mpname);
+    mpx->mpxname = xstrdup(mpxopt->mpxname);
+    @<Install and test the non-local jump buffer@>;
+    if (mpx->debug) {
+      mpx->errfile = stderr;
+    } else {
+      mpx->errfile = mpx_xfopen(mpx,MPXLOG, "wb");
+    }
+    mpx->progname = "dvitomp";
+    if (mpx_dvitomp(mpx, mpx->mpname)) {
+	  if (!mpx->debug)
+	    remove(mpx->mpxname);
+	  mpx_abort(mpx, "Dvi conversion failed: %s %s\n",
+	                  DVIERR, mpx->mpxname);
+    }
+    mpx_fclose(mpx,mpx->mpxfile);
+    if (!mpx->debug)
+      mpx_fclose(mpx,mpx->errfile);
+    if (!mpx->debug) {
+	  remove(MPXLOG);
+	  remove(ERRLOG);
+    }
+    mpx_erasetmp(mpx);
+    retcode = mpx->history;
+    mpx_xfree(mpx->buf);
+    for (i = 0; i < (int)mpx->nfonts; i++)
+      mpx_xfree(mpx->font_name[i]);
+    free(mpx);
+    if (retcode == mpx_cksum_trouble)
+       retcode = 0;
+    return retcode;
+}
+
+
+@ \TeX\ has to operate on an actual input file, so we have to append
+that to the command line.
+
+@<Run |TeX| and set ...@>=
+{
+  char log[15];
+  mpx->maincmd = xrealloc(mpx->maincmd,strlen(mpx->maincmd)+strlen(mpx->tex)+2,1);
+  strcat(mpx->maincmd, " ");
+  strcat(mpx->maincmd, mpx->tex);
+  cmdlength = split_command(mpx->maincmd, cmdline);
+
+  retcode = mpx_run_command(mpx, NULL, NULL, cmdlength, cmdline);
+
+  TMPNAME_EXT(log, ".log");
+  if (!retcode) {
+    TMPNAME_EXT(infile, ".dvi");
+    remove(log);
+  } else {
+    mpx_rename(mpx,mpx->tex, TEXERR);
+    mpx_rename(mpx,log, ERRLOG);
+    mpx_command_error(mpx, cmdlength, cmdline);
+  }
+  mpx_command_cleanup(mpx, cmdline);
+}
+
+@ @<Run |Troff| and set ...@>=
+{
+  char *cur_in, *cur_out;
+  char tmp_a[15], tmp_b[15];
+  TMPNAME_EXT(tmp_a, ".t");   
+  TMPNAME_EXT(tmp_b, ".tmp");
+  cur_in = mpx->tex;
+  cur_out = tmp_a;
+
+  /* split the command in bits */
+  cmdbitlength = split_pipes(mpx->maincmd, cmdbits);
+  cmdline = NULL;
+
+  for (i = 0; i < cmdbitlength; i++) {
+    if (cmdline!=NULL) free(cmdline);
+    cmdlength = split_command(cmdbits[i], cmdline);
+    retcode = mpx_run_command(mpx, cur_in, cur_out, cmdlength, cmdline);
+	    
+    if (retcode) {
+	  mpx_rename(mpx,mpx->tex, TROFF_INERR);
+      mpx_command_error(mpx, cmdlength, cmdline);
+    }
+    if (i < cmdbitlength - 1) {
+	  if (i % 2 == 0) {
+        cur_in = tmp_a;
+        cur_out = tmp_b;
+	  } else {
+        cur_in = tmp_b;
+        cur_out = tmp_a;
+	  }
+    }
+  }
+  if (tmp_a!=cur_out) { remove(tmp_a); }
+  if (tmp_b!=cur_out) { remove(tmp_b); }
+  strcpy(infile,cur_out);
+}
+
+@ If MPX file is up-to-date or if MP file does not exist, do nothing. 
+
+@<Check if mp file is newer than mpxfile, exit if not@>=
+if (mpx_newer(mpxopt->mpname, mpxopt->mpxname))
+   return 0
+
+
+@  The splint comment is here because this use of |sprintf()| is definately safe
+
+@<Initialize the |tmpname| variable@>=
+@= /*@@-bufferoverflowhigh@@*/ @> 
+#ifdef HAVE_MKSTEMP
+    i = mkstemp(tmpname);
+    if (i == -1) {
+      sprintf(tmpname, "mp%06d", (int)(time(NULL) % 1000000));
+    } else {
+      close(i);
+      remove(tmpname);
+    }
+#else
+#ifdef HAVE_MKTEMP
+  {
+    char *tmpstring = mktemp(tmpname);
+    if ((tmpstring == NULL) || strlen(tmpname) == 0) {
+      sprintf(tmpname, "mp%06d", (int)(time(NULL) % 1000000));
+    } else {
+      /* this should not really be needed, but better
+         safe than sorry. */
+      if (tmpstring != tmpname) {
+	    i = strlen(tmpstring);
+	    if (i > 8) i = 8;
+	      strncpy(tmpname, tmpstring, i);
+      }
+    }
+  }
+#else
+    sprintf(tmpname, "mp%06d", (int)(time(NULL) % 1000000));
+#endif
+#endif
+@= /*@@+bufferoverflowhigh@@*/ @>